Toyota 2005 Tundra Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2005-Tundra-Owners-Manual-763176 toyota-2005-tundra-owners-manual-763176 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 498 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

0-1
0-2
0-5
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
2
3
4
5
6
7-1
7-2
7-3
8
9
10
Back
CM
seatbelt

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and

quality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants

follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For

important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete

satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

DU.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Tol l−free: 1−800−331−4331

DCANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll −free: 1−888−TOYOTA−8 (1−888−869−6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of

continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may

find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

Motor Corporation.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-

age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to

avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are

used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause

injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are

informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and

others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause

damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning

is ignored. You are informed about what you must or

must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of

damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbol

shown above, it means: “Do not...”;

“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this

happen”.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

Model code

Check the model code to see what type of model your vehicle is.

U C K 3 0 − T R D

The model code appears on the Certification Label with the heading “MODEL”.

See “Your Toyota’s identification” in Section 2 for the Certification Label location.

Grade

D: Standard grade

S: SR5 grade

L: Limited grade

Engine type

GSK: 1GR−FE en-

gine

UCK: 2UZ−FE engine

Driving system

30, 31: Two−wheel drive

40, 41: Four−wheel drive

Deck type

R: Standard bed

S: StepSide bed

Cab type

T: Standard cab

A: Access cab

P: Double cab

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

491

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

INDEX

Index

SECTION 10

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster overview 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Side vents

2. Instrument cluster

3. Center vents

4. Personal lights

5. Garage door opener box or auxiliary

box

6. Side defroster outlet

7. Glove box

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Manual transmission gear shift lever

11. Rear console box

12. Cup holders

13. Parking brake lever

14. Tire pressure warning system reset

switch

15. Lower vent

16. Hood lock release lever

17. Window lock switch

18. Power rear view mirror control switches

Instrument panel overview (standard and access cab models)

"Vehicles with manual transmission

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Side vents

2. Instrument cluster

3. Automatic transmission selector lever

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary

box

7. Side defroster outlet

8. Glove box

9. Power door lock switches

10. Power window switches

11. Auxiliary box

12. Rear console box

13. Cup holders

14. Passenger airbag manual on−off switch

15. Tire pressure warning system reset

switch

16. Lower vent

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Parking brake pedal

19. Window lock switch

20. Power rear view mirror control switches

"Vehicles with automatic transmission (type A)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Side vents

2. Instrument cluster

3. Automatic transmission selector lever

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary

box

7. Side defroster outlet

8. Glove box

9. Power door lock switches

10. Power window switches

11. Rear condole box

12. Cup holders

13. Tire pressure warning system reset

switch

14. Lower vent

15. Hood lock release lever

16. Parking brake pedal

17. Window lock switch

18. Power rear view mirror control switches

"Vehicles with automatic transmission (type B)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Outside rear view mirror heater switch

2. Power back window switch

3. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

4. Ignition switch

5. Wiper and washer switches

6. Automatic transmission shift position

“L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)

7. Emergency flasher switch

8. Audio system or navigation system

including audio system

(For the navigation system, see the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”)

9. Air conditioning controls

10. Front passenger’s occupant

classification indicator light/front

passenger’s seat belt reminder

light/passenger airbag on−off indicator

light

11. Cargo lamp switch

12. Clock

13. “4LO” switch

(transfer mode selector switch)

14. Cup holder

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

15. Power outlets

16. Passenger airbag manual on−off switch

17. Ashtray

18. Cigarette lighter

19. “2WD/4HI” switch

(transfer mode selector switch)

20. “AUTO LSD” switch

21. Cruise control switch

22. Audio remote control switches

23. Tilt steering lock release lever

24. Toyota vehicle intrusion protection

system (TVIP) indicator light

25. Instrument panel light control knob

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Side vents

2. Instrument cluster

3. Center vents

4. Multi−information display

5. Personal lights

6. Auxiliary box

7. Electric moon roof switches

8. Side defroster outlet

9. Glove box

10. Power door lock switches

11. Power window switches

12. Seat heater switches

13. Rear console box

14. Input terminal adapter

15. Headphone input jacks and headphone

volume control dials

16. Power outlets

17. Cup holders

18. Power outlet main switch

19. Tire pressure warning system reset

switch

20. Lower vent

Instrument panel overview (double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

21. Hood lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Power back window switch

2. Power rear view mirror control switches

3. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)

4. Instrument panel light control knob

5. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

6. Wiper and washer switches

7. Automatic transmission selector lever

8. Automatic transmission shift position

“L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)

9. Audio system or navigation system

including audio system

(For the navigation system, see the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”)

10. Air conditioning controls

11. Front passenger’s occupant

classification indicator light/front

passenger’s seat belt reminder light

12. Cargo lamp switch

13. Back window and outside rear view

mirror defogger switch

14. Clock

15. Cup holder

16. Power outlets

17. Ashtray

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

18. “4LO” switch

(transfer mode selector switch)

19. Cigarette lighter

20. “2WD/4HI” switch

(transfer mode selector switch)

21. “AUTO LSD” switch

22. Emergency flasher switch

23. Cruise control switch

24. Ignition switch

25. Audio remote control switches

26. Tilt steering lock release lever

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Trip meter reset knob

6. Odometer and two trip meters

Instrument cluster overview

"Without tachometer

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

2. Oil pressure gauge

3. Tachometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

9. Voltmeter

"With tachometer

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Brake system warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

DVehicle stability control system warning

light∗1

DTraction control system warning light∗1

D“AUTO LSD” system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

warning light∗1 (four−wheel drive models)

Unengaged “Park” warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning

light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” in Section 1−6.

∗2: For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” in Section 1−3.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” in Sec-

tion 1−7.

∗4: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” in Section 1−7.

Cruise control indicator light∗4

Low speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3

(four−wheel drive models)

High speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3

(four−wheel drive models)

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Overdrive−off indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Slip indicator light

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

DFront passenger occupant classification

indicator light

DPassenger airbag on−off indicator light

Theft deterrent system indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

indicator light∗2

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

307

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Other equipment

Multi−information display 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clock 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlets (12 VDC) 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlet (115 VAC) 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glove box 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Garage door opener box 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary boxes 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear console box 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coin holder 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compact disc and cassette tape holder 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cassette tape holder 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cup holders 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note pad holder 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Floor mat 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 10

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

308

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. “E/M” button

2. Garage door opener buttons

3. “MODE” button

4. Garage door opener indicator

5. Outside temperature display

6. Compass

Multi−information display—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

309

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Operate the multi−information display

with the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to

“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-

played just before the ignition switch is

turned off will appear.

When the instrument panel lights are

turned on, the brightness of the display

will be reduced.

“E/M” button

This button is used to switch between

English/U.S. Customary System and

metric units of the outside temperature

display.

Each time you push this button, the dis-

play switches. This is also linked to the

multi−information display. The display vari-

ations are as follows;

Indication Outside

temperature

English/U.S. Customary

System (E) F

Metric (M) C

The initial mode will be English/U.S. Cus-

tomary System units, however, if the unit

is switched to metric and the ignition

switch is off, it will display metric units

when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”.

“MODE” button

This button is used to select the item.

Every time you push the “MODE” button,

the display toggles.

For more details, see “—Outside tempera-

ture display” in this Section.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

—Before using the

multi−information display

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

310

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The garage door opener ( 

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

under license from HomeLink and can

be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,

home lighting systems, and security

systems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3

buttons and you can store one program

for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the

HomeLink, install a new battery in the

hand−held transmitter prior to program-

ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-

mitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLink during the programming pro-

cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure

in “Programming an entrance gate/pro-

gramming all devices in the Canadian

market”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons

you want to program. Push and hold

down one of the buttons until the indi-

cator corresponding to the selected

channel begins to flash.

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-

ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from

the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the

hand−held garage transmitter button

along with the selected HomeLink but-

ton.

4. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by

pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener,

check to see if the garage door opens

and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-

tify if your garage transmitter is of the

“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button. The ga-

rage door has the rolling code feature if

the indicator light (on the HomeLink)

flashes rapidly and then remains lit after

2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is

the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the

heading “Programming a rolling code sys-

tem”.

—Garage door opener

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

311

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”

equipped, it is necessary to follow

steps 1 through 4 under the heading

“Programming the HomeLink” before

proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

The exact location and color of the

button may vary by brand of garage

door opener. Refer to the owner’s

guide supplied by the garage door

opener manufacturer for the location of

this “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds

in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-

grammed HomeLink button twice. The

garage door may open. If the door

does open, the programming process is

complete. If the door does not open,

press and release the button a third

time. This third press and release will

complete the programming process by

opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener

motor should now recognize the

HomeLink unit and be able activate the

garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-

ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but-

tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/device

transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

away from the surface of the

HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected

HomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)

the hand−held gate/device transmitter

button every two seconds until step 5

is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by

pressing the newly programmed button.

Check to see if the gate/device oper-

ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home

security systems, home door locks or

lighting, contact your authorized Toyota

dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be

erased, however, to reprogram a single

button, follow the procedure “Programming

the HomeLink”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink, press the

appropriate HomeLink button to activate

the programmed device. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on. The

HomeLink continues to send the signal

for up to 20 seconds as long as the

button is pressed.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

312

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes

at one time, press and hold down the 2

outside buttons for 20 seconds until the

indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase

the programs stored in the HomeLink

memory.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may be

operating a garage door or other

device. Make sure people and ob-

jects are out of the way of the ga-

rage door or other device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer-

sal Transceiver with any garage

door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as re-

quired by federal safety standards.

(This includes any garage door

opener model manufactured before

April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-

er which cannot detect an object

(signaling the door to stop and re-

verse), does not meet current feder-

al safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these features

increases risk of serious injury or

death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC

Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undersired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been

tested and complies with FCC and IC

rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

device.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

313

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The outside temperature display indi-

cates the outside air temperature.

Every time you push the “MODE” button,

the display toggles through the following

information. To use the outside tempera-

ture display, push the “MODE” button until

the outside air temperature is displayed.

1. Compass and outside temperature

2. Display off (no compass)

3. Compass

4. Outside temperature

To set the unit, push the “E/M” button

until the desired unit display appears.

The displayed value is updated every 2

second.

The displayed temperature ranges from

−30C (−22F) up to 50C (122F).

If an abnormality exists in the connection

of the outside air temperature sensor,

“−−C” (“−−F”) will appear on the display.

If “−−C” (“−−F”) appears on the display,

contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−C” (“−−F”)

appears momentarily when the ignition is

quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it

goes out soon.

The compass indicates the direction

that the vehicle is heading. In the

above case, it shows that the vehicle is

heading south.

The direction display is updated every 2

seconds.

Displays Directions

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

—Outside temperature display —Compass

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

314

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The compass may not show the correct

direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af-

ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the

vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off imme-

diately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a

magnet or a metal object on or near

the roof.)

The battery has been disconnected.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-

tion automatically while the vehicle is in

motion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for complete

calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE

COMPASS” below.

If the direction is not indicated or the

system does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the inside of

the roof.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object

on or near the roof of the vehicle.

Doing this may cause malfunction of

the compass sensor.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

315

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation

calibration)

The direction display on the compass

deviates from the true direction deter-

mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The

angle of deviation varies according to the

geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place and

switch the display to the outside tem-

perature. (To switch to this mode, see

“—Outside temperature display” in this

Section.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and

“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 5 sec-

onds until the “VAR” indication appears

on the compass display.

3. Push the “E/M” button several times

until the desired zone number appears

on the compass display.

If the button is not pushed for 10 sec-

onds, the display returns to the compass/

outside temperature mode and the number

that is last set is memorized.

To select the zone where the vehicle is

currently located, refer to the following

map.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

316

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Zone numbers

After calibration, leaving the system for

several seconds returns to the compass

mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

317

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling

calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the

compass may not change after a turn. In

this case, the compass needs to be cali-

brated.

To calibrate the compass manually, do the

following;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place and

switch the display to the outside tem-

perature. (To switch to this mode, see

“—Outside temperature display” in this

Section.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and

“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 10

seconds until the “CAL” indication ap-

pears on the compass display. (At this

time, the compass display is locked in

“N”.)

3. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h

(5 mph) or less. If there is not enough

space to drive in a circle, drive around

the block.

When the “CAL” indication goes off and

the compass returns to the normal mode,

calibration is complete.

If you want to restart the calibration be-

fore it is complete, push both of the

“MODE” and “E/M” buttons simultaneously

for 10 seconds again.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

318

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Perform circling calibration just after

you have purchased your Toyota. And

then always perform circling calibration

after the battery has been removed, re-

placed or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of

the compass in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec-

tric systems (moon roof, power win-

dows, etc.) as they may interfere with

the calibration.

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration,

be sure to secure a wide space,

and watch out for people and ve-

hicles in the neighborhood. Do not

violate any local traffic rules while

performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.

To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the clock, the time dis-

play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one

o’clock).

When the instrument panel lights are

turned on, the brightness of the time in-

dication will be reduced.

Cigarette lighter and front ashtray

Rear ashtray

Clock Cigarette lighter and ashtrays

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

319

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.

After it finishes heating up, it automati-

cally pops out ready for use.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed

in.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or

equivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAYS

Front: To use the ashtray, pull it out.

Rear: To use the ashtray, raise the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-

oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-

vent other cigarette butts from catching

fire. After using the ashtray, push it back

in completely.

Front—To remove the ashtray, press down

on the lock spring plate and pull out.

Rear—To remove the ashtray, pull it out.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, always completely close

the ashtray after use.

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

Power outlets (12 VDC)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

320

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type E

The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-

signed for power supply for car acces-

sories.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity

over the total vehicle capacity of

12V/120W.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlets longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lids when

the power outlets are not in use.

Inserting anything other than an ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet,

or allowing any liquid to get into

the outlet may cause electrical fail-

ure or short circuits.

This power outlet (115 VAC) is designed

for use as a power supply for electric

appliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

321

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate

plug that fits the outlet may cause

electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even

though their power consumption is un-

der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances

may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

322

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn it

clockwise.

On some models, the glove box light will

come on when the glove box is opened

with the headlight switch on.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the glove box door

closed while driving.

The box is designed to store a garage

door opener transmitter.

Open the cover and remove the Velcro

square.

Remove the paper strip covering the adhe-

sive on back side of square and adhere

the square to back side of the transmitter

near the center.

Glove box Garage door opener box

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

323

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Please note if transmitter has wire clip for

sun visor, this clip must be removed prior

to adhesion of the Velcro.

Place the transmitter with Velcro square

facing inside of box into the box. Make

sure the transmitter button is located

above button pins.

Remove spacers from the center panel.

Place the largest spacer on the pin that

would be below transmitter button when

the cover is closed. Close the cover.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

324

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When the garage door opener transmitter

is properly installed, you can operate the

transmitter by pushing the center panel of

the cover.

If the center panel does not contact your

garage door opener transmitter:

Check to see if spacer is on the cor-

rect pin.

Attach another spacer to the top of

original spacer. Check operation. If re-

quired, continue to add spacers until

contact is achieved.

If the transmitter is clattering during driv-

ing, fill in a piece of felt or pad to prevent

the transmitter from clattering.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the garage door

opener box closed while driving.

Keep the remaining spacers away

from children.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

325

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models only—

The auxiliary box (stored in the glove

box) and garage door opener box are

interchangeable.

Removing the cover—

Half open the cover. Pinch each hinge and

pull it out of its pivot one at a time as

shown above.

Do not remove the cover forcibly.

Installing the cover—

Align the hinges to the pivots, and press

each hinge until you hear a click.

Make sure that the cover opens and

closes smoothly.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the

lids as shown in the following illustra-

tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the auxiliary box

closed while driving.

Type A and B only—As these hold-

ers are designed for holding a light

object such as an eyeglass, do not

place any heavy objects in them.

Heavy objects may cause the holder

to open and contents to fly out re-

sulting in injuries.

NOTICE

Type A and B only—During hot weath-

er, the interior of the vehicle becomes

very hot. Do not leave anything flam-

mable or deformable such as a light-

er, glasses, etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

326

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type A

Type B Type C

Type D

Front

Type E (under the rear seat of access cab

models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

327

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Front

Type F (under the rear seat of double cab

models)

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-

sole box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the upper tray closed

while driving.

Rear console box (type A)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

328

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, raise

the upper tray by pulling up the lock

release lever.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-

sole box upper lid while pushing the

lock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the upper tray closed

while driving.

Rear console box (type B)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

329

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, raise

the console box lid by pulling up the

lock release lever.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

The rear console box is equipped with

a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the console box lid.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

Coin holder (type A)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

330

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear console box is equipped with

a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the console box upper lid while

pushing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder (type B)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

331

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The coin holder can be set in the con-

sole box.

To set the coin holder in the console box,

raise the console box lid by pulling up the

lock release lever.

The auxiliary box is equipped with a

coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the auxiliary box lid while push-

ing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder (type C)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

332

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear console box is equipped with

compact disc and cassette tape holders.

To use the holders, raise the console box

lid and upper tray by pulling up the lock

release lever.

The plates for the compact disc and cas-

sette tape holders are detachable.

Compact disc and cassette

tape holder (type A)

Compact disc and cassette

tape holder (type B)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

333

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear console box is equipped with

a compact disc and cassette tape hold-

er.

To use the holder, raise the console box

lid by pulling up the lock release lever.

The compact disc and cassette tape hold-

er is detachable.

The auxiliary box is equipped with a

cassette tape holder.

To use the holder, raise the auxiliary box

lid while pushing the lock release button.

The plate for the cassette tape holder is

detachable.

Cassette tape holder

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

334

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The cup holder is designed for holding

cups or drink−cans securely. To use

them, observe the following illustra-

tions.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other

than cups or drink−cans in the cup

holder, as such items may be

thrown about and possibly injure

people in the vehicle during sudden

braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop while driving, keep the cup

holder closed when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Type A only—As this holder is de-

signed for holding soft cups only, do

not place too heavy a cup, drink−can

or bottle in it.

Type A

Type B Type C

Cup holders

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

335

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type C cup holders are equipped with

a detachable adapter for each holder.

When you remove the adapter, a bigger

cup can be held in the holder.

Type D

Type E

Type F

Type G

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

336

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear console box is equipped with

a note pad holder. This is designed to

hold small paper such as note pads.

To use the holder, raise the console box

upper lid while pushing the lock release

button.

CAUTION

Do not write on the note pad holder

while the vehicle is moving.

Do not place anything else on the

note pad holder. Such items may be

thrown about in the compartment

and possibly cause injury during

sudden braking or an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop while driving, keep the console

box upper lid closed when it is not

in use.

Grocery bag hooks

Cargo net hooks

Note pad holder Grocery bag/cargo net hooks

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

337

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

These hooks are designed to hang

things like grocery bags or cargo net.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-

cluded as an original equipment, these

hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

zTo prevent damage to the hooks,

avoid hanging heavy loads on them

when using them as grocery bag

hooks.

zTo prevent damage to the hook,

avoid hanging things other than a

cargo net on it when using them as

cargo net hooks.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have a

hole, then it is designed for use with a

locking clip. Fix the floor mat with locking

clip into the hole in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the floor carpet. If the floor

mat slips and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during driv-

ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

338

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front doors 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side doors 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Access doors 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless remote control 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power windows 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear side windows 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power back window 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hood 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system (TVIP) 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft deterrent system 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel tank cap 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric moon roof 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

These keys work in every lock.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds

of keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-

ery lock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in the

glove box.

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

Both doors lock and unlock simultaneously

with either door. In the driver’s door lock,

turning the key once will unlock the driv-

er’s door and twice in succession will un-

lock the driver’s door and passenger’s

door simultaneously.

Keys

Front doors (standard and

access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

The door will not lock if the key is left in

the ignition switch when closing the front

doors.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the

rear side.

Both doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle during an accident. It also helps

prevent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the doors lock and unlock simulta-

neously with either front door. In the driv-

er’s door lock, turning the key once will

unlock the driver’s door and twice in suc-

cession will unlock all the doors simulta-

neously.

This double key turning operation to un-

lock all the doors can be changed to a

single key turning operation. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

When all the doors are unlocked simulta-

neously using a key, the interior light, igni-

tion switch light, step light come on for

about 15 seconds and cargo lamp for

about 20 seconds before fading out. (For

details, see “Center interior and personal

lights”, “Ignition switch and step lights”

and “Cargo lamp” in Section 1−5.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling

the inside handles even if the lock knobs

are in the locked position.

Side doors

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the

front doors while driving. The doors

will open and an accident may occur.

Toyota strongly recommends that all

children be placed in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

Doors cannot be locked when either front

door is open and the key is in the igni-

tion.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the

rear side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-

ly.

When the front doors are locked with the

inside lock knob, the key or the wireless

remote control transmitter, the power door

lock switch will not work until either front

door is unlocked with the key, lock knob,

or wireless remote control transmitter.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”

position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, you

cannot open the rear door by the inside

door handle. We recommend using this

feature whenever small children are in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle during an accident. It also helps

prevent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

Access doors

(access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

For easy access to the rear seat, open

the access door (rear door).

To open: First, open the front door widely.

Then pull the outside handle or inside le-

ver of the access door.

If you try to open the front and rear doors

simultaneously, they will not open.

To close: First, close the access door

completely. Then close the front door.

You can open and close the access door

only when the front door is widely opened.

NOTICE

The front door and access door could

be damaged if they hit each other

when being opened or closed. Be

sure to follow the above instructions.

1. Indicator light

2. “LOCK” switch

3. “UNLOCK” switch

4. “PANIC” switch

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all the

doors or activate the “PANIC” mode

from a distance within approximately 1

m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push it

slowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter is

an electronic component. Observe the fol-

lowing instructions in order not to cause

damage to the transmitter.

DDo not leave the transmitter in places

where the temperature becomes high

such as on the dashboard.

DDo not disassemble it.

DAvoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

DAvoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-

trol transmitters for the same vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed

information.

Wireless remote control

(standard and access cab

models for U.S.A. only)—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the wireless remote control transmitter

does not actuate the doors or alarm, or

operate from a normal distance, or the

indicator light on the transmitter is

dimmed or does not come on:

DCheck for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the transmitter.

DThe battery may have been consumed.

Check the battery in the transmitter. To

replace the battery, see “—Replacing

battery”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-

dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-

mote control transmitter” in Section 4.)

MODEL/FCC ID: BAB237131−056

CAN: 2024 102 1519

ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A.

This complies with Part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

—Locking and unlocking

doors

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To lock and unlock all the doors, push

the switches slowly and securely. At

this time, the indicator light on the

transmitter flash once.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the

doors are locked simultaneously. At this

time one beep will be heard, and the tail

lights and front side marker lights will

flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securely

locked.

If any door is not securely closed, locking

cannot be performed by the “LOCK”

switch and a beep will sound continuously

for 5 seconds. However, if the key is in

the ignition, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the doors se-

curely or push the “UNLOCK” switch.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch

once to unlock the driver’s door alone.

Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds

unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each

time the “UNLOCK” switch is pushed, two

beeps will be heard, and the tail lights

and front side marker lights will flash

twice.

When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,

the interior light, personal light come on.

The lights remain on for about 30 seconds

unless any door is opened and closed.

(For details, see “Interior light” and “Per-

sonal lights” in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

doors will be automatically locked again.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept

pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-

tion is not repeated. Release the switch

and then push again. Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the

horn intermittently, flashes the tail

lights, and turns on the interior light.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-

hicle theft when you witness anyone at-

tempting to break into or damage your

vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

alarm midway, push the “PANIC” switch

once again, lock or unlock any door with

the key or transmitter, or turn the ignition

key from the “LOCK” to “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work when

the ignition key is in the ignition switch.

—Activating panic mode

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed transmitter battery or

components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-

ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the

transmitter case.

2. Remove the rubber gasket and set it

aside.

—Replacing battery

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-

tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

4. Put in a new transmitter battery with

positive (+) side up.

Place the rubber gasket back on the

transmitter. Then close the transmitter

case securely.

NOTICE

zMake sure the positive side and

negative side of the transmitter bat-

tery are faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the transmitter bat-

tery and that dust or oils do not

adhere to the transmitter case.

zClose the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-

mitter still does not operate properly, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. “LOCK” switch

2. “UNLOCK” switch

3. “PANIC” switch

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all the

doors or activate the “PANIC” mode

from a distance within approximately 1

m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push it

slowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter is

an electronic component. Observe the fol-

lowing instructions in order not to cause

damage to the transmitter.

DDo not leave the transmitter in places

where the temperature becomes high

such as on the dashboard.

DDo not disassemble it.

DAvoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

DAvoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-

trol transmitters for the same vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed

information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter

does not actuate the doors or alarm, or

operate from a normal distance:

DCheck for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the transmitter.

DThe battery may have been consumed.

Check the battery in the transmitter. To

replace the battery, see “—Replacing

battery”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-

dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-

mote control transmitter” in Section 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

Wireless remote control

(double cab models)—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

DReorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

DIncrease the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

DConnect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

DConsult the dealer or an experienced

radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

—Locking and unlocking

doors

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To lock and unlock all the doors, push

the switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the

doors are locked simultaneously. At this

time one beep will be heard, and the

parking lights, tail lights and license plate

lights flash once.

Check to see that all the doors are se-

curely locked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed,

locking cannot be performed by the

“LOCK” switch and a beep will sound con-

tinuously for 10 seconds. However, if the

key is in the ignition, a beep will not

sound.

To stop the beep, close all the doors se-

curely or push the “UNLOCK” switch.

The beep can be disabled. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch

once to unlock the driver’s door alone.

Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds

unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each

time the “UNLOCK” switch is pushed, two

beeps will be heard, and the parking

lights, tail lights and license plate lights

flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all

the doors can be changed to a single

switch operation. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

When all the doors are unlocked simulta-

neously with a wireless remote control

transmitter, the interior light, ignition

switch light, step light come on for about

15 seconds and cargo lamp for about 20

seconds before fading out, even if the

door is not opened. (For details, see

“Center interior and personal lights”, “Igni-

tion switch and step lights” and “Cargo

lamp” in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

doors will be automatically locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock

function can be changed. For details, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept

pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-

tion is not repeated. Release the switch

and then push again.

The wireless door locking or unlocking

function can be erased. For details, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

SWITCHING BEEP SOUND ON AND OFF

You can switch the beep on and off. (The

beep is on initially and after battery re-

placement.)

To switch the beep on and off:

With the driver’s door opened—

1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.

2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignition

key again and turn it to the “ON” posi-

tion.

3. After 10 seconds, push the same

“LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or “PANIC” switch

twice within 10 seconds.

Two beep sounds inform you that the

program has been switched on or off.

If this procedure is not followed exactly,

the beep will not operate as expected.

Check the beep ON/OFF operation by

pushing the transmitter switch after you

finish this procedure. If the beep does not

operate as expected, repeat this proce-

dure from step 1.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the

horn intermittently and flashes the

headlights and tail lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-

hicle theft when you witness anyone at-

tempting to break into or damage your

vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

alarm midway, do the following:

DPush any of the switches on the wire-

less remote control transmitter.

DUnlock any of the doors with the key.

DTurn the ignition key from the “LOCK”

to the “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work when

the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the transmitter bat-

tery, be careful not to lose the com-

ponents.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the battery by following these

procedures:

—Activating panic mode —Replacing battery

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the

transmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-

tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery with

positive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

zMake sure the positive side and

negative side of the transmitter bat-

tery are faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the transmitter bat-

tery and that dust or oils do not

adhere to the transmitter case.

zClose the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-

mitter still does not operate properly, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

The windows can be operated with the

switch on either front door (standard

and access cab models)/each door

(double cab models).

The power windows work when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, they work for 43 seconds even

after the ignition switch is turned off. They

stop working when either front door is

opened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

Power windows

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

Automatic operation (to open only):

Push the switch completely down and then

release it. The window will fully open. To

stop the window partway, lightly pull the

switch up and then release it.

Window lock switch

Driver’s door switch (standard and access

cab models)

Window

lock

switch

Driver’s door switches (double cab mod-

els)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Passenger’s door switch (Standard and

access cab models)

Passenger’s door switch (Double cab

models)

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

Use the switches on the passenger’s

door (standard and access cab mod-

els)/passengers’ doors (double cab

models) or the switch on the driver’s

door that controls each passenger’s

window.

The window moves as long as you hold

the switch.

To open: Push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the passenger’s (stan-

dard and access cab models)/ passengers’

(double cab models) windows and power

back window cannot be operated.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

DBefore you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is

nobody around the power windows.

You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in a serious injury.

When anyone closes the power win-

dows, make sure he or she oper-

ates the windows safely.

DWhen small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

window switches without supervi-

sion. Use the window lock switch to

prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switches.

DBe sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power window switches and

get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

To open the rear side window, pull the

latch handle toward you and swing it

fully out.

After closing the window, make sure it is

completely closed.

Rear side windows

(access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To open the back window, push the le-

ver and slide the window.

After closing the window, make sure it is

completely closed.

Access cab models

Double cab models

The back window can be operated with

the switch on the instrument panel.

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-

tion.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, they work 43 seconds even after

the ignition switch is turned off. The pow-

er back window stops working when either

front door is opened.

The back window moves as long as you

hold the switch.

Access cab models—

To open: Push the switch on the “ ”

side.

To close: Push the switch on the “ ”

side.

Double cab models—

To open: Push the switch on the “ ”

side.

To close: Push the switch on the “ ”

side. At this time, the window will stop

partway. Push the switch again to fully

close the window.

Back window Power back window

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Access cab models only—If you push in

the window lock switch on the driver’s

door, the back window cannot be oper-

ated.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

DBefore you close the power back

window, always make sure there is

nobody around the power back win-

dow. You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in a serious injury.

When anyone closes the power

back window, make sure he or she

operates the window safely.

DWhen small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

back window switch without super-

vision.

DBe sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power back window switch

and get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

DKeep the back window closed while

driving. This not only keeps the

luggage from being thrown out but

also prevents exhaust gases from

entering the vehicle.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPENING

To open the tailgate, pull the handle up.

The support cables will hold the tailgate

horizontal.

See “—Stowage precautions” in Section 2

for precautions when loading luggage.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling and

pushing it to make sure it is securely

closed.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with the tailgate open.

Support cable bracket

REMOVAL

1. Open the tailgate to the angle where

you can release the brackets on the

support cables from the lugs on

both sides.

To release the support cable bracket, lift

it up and slide it off.

2. Tilt the tailgate to about 30° from

vertical and pull up the right side of

the tailgate to unhook the right side.

Tailgate

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. Slide the tailgate a little to the right

to unhook the left side.

To attach the tailgate, follow the removal

procedure in reverse order.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling it to-

ward you to make sure it is securely

closed.

We recommend you keep the tailgate

closed when not in use.

NOTICE

Make sure the support brackets are

securely latched on both side panels

when installing the tailgate.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it to lock or unlock the tailgate.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.

To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood

is closed and securely locked. Other-

wise, the hood may open unexpected-

ly while driving and an accident may

occur.

Hood

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

auxiliary catch lever and lift the

hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that

you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

etc. Then lower the hood and make sure

it locks into place. If necessary, press

down gently on the front edge to lock it.

TVIP is a theft deterrent system. If

someone attempts to damage or break

into your vehicle, the system sounds

the alarm while flashing the lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

You can set the system as follows.

1. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.

3. Close all the doors securely.

4. Lock all the doors with the key or re-

mote keyless entry transmitter. At this

time, the TVIP indicator light comes

on.

The system will be set in 30 seconds.

When the system is set, the indicator

light will start to flash.

Toyota vehicle intrusion protection

system (TVIP) (standard and

access cab models for U.S.A. only)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

5. Make sure that the indicator light

flashes. Then you may leave the ve-

hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when

you set the system because unlocking

from the inside activates the alarm.

Activating the alarm

If the system detects a threat to the

vehicle, blows the horn intermittently

for one minute while flashing tail lights

and front side marker lights, and turns

on the interior light.

The system detects a threat under any of

the following conditions:

DEither of the front doors is unlocked by

means other than the key or remote

keyless entry transmitter.

If the key is not in the ignition switch,

all the doors will be automatically

locked again.

DAny door is forcibly opened.

DThe side windows are tapped or bro-

ken.

DThe battery terminal is disconnected

and then reconnected.

DThe ignition is hotwired.

After one minute, the alarm automatically

stops and the indicator light starts flashing

again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, until you cancel the system, the

system automatically resets the alarm af-

ter the alarm has stopped.

The alarm will activate again under the

same circumstances described in “Activat-

ing the alarm”.

Stopping the alarm

You can stop the alarm in either of the

following ways:

DUnlock any of the doors with the key

or remote keyless entry transmitter.

DPlace the ignition switch in the “ON”

position.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

You can cancel the system as described

in “Stopping the alarm”.

If you cancel the system by unlocking any

of the doors but no door is opened within

30 seconds, all the doors lock automati-

cally and the system will be set again.

NOTE: If your vehicle’s tail lights and

front side marker lights turn on

and the buzzer sounds for 2 sec-

onds when the system is can-

celed, the trigger memory was ac-

tivated; an alarm was triggered

while you were away from the ve-

hicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

You can check the system operation as

follows.

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described in

“SETTING THE SYSTEM”.

3. Unlock the driver’s door with the inside

lock knob. The system should activate

and the alarm should sound.

4. Stop the alarm as described in “Stop-

ping the alarm”.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the passen-

ger’s door.

If the system does not work properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To deter vehicle theft, the system is

designed to sound an alarm if any of

the doors or hood is forcibly unlocked

or opened or the battery terminal is

disconnected and then reconnected

when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently

and flashes the headlights and tail lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”

position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when

the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all

the doors and hood are closed and

locked.

The system will automatically be set after

30 seconds. When the system is set, the

indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light

starts flashing, you may leave the ve-

hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when

you set the system, because unlocking

from the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under

the following conditions:

DIf any of the doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter, or if the hood

is forcibly opened

DIf the battery terminal is disconnected

and then reconnected

The indicator light will come on when the

system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the

key is not in the ignition switch, all the

doors will re−lock automatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-

cally stop and the indicator light will starts

flashing again.

Theft deterrent system

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets

the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the

same circumstances described in

“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following

two ways:

DTurn the ignition key from the “LOCK”

to “ON” position.

DUnlock any of the doors with the key

or wireless remote control transmitter.

These ways cancel the system at the

same time.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.

The doors should be locked with the

key or wireless remote control transmit-

ter. Be sure to wait until the indicator

light goes off or starts flashing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. The

system should activate the alarm.

4. Stopping the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other

doors and hood. When testing the

hood, also check that the system is

activated when the battery terminal is

disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Without tachometer

With tachometer

Fuel tank cap

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This indicates that the fuel filler door

is on the left side of your vehicle.

Type A

Type B

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the

door toward out as shown.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

DDo not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.

The fumes are flammable.

DWhen opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weath-

er, fuel under pressure could cause

injury by spraying out of the filler

neck if the cap is suddenly re-

moved.

DDo not fill a fuel container on a

plastic truck bed liner, a rubber

truck bed mat, or any other insulat-

ing material. A static electricity

charge could cause a spark and fire

hazard. The proper procedure is to

place an approved fuel container on

the ground away from the truck for

filling.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type A

Type B

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn

the cap counterclockwise by 90 de-

grees (to the pressure point 1), and

then turn it an additional 30 degrees

(to point 2). Pause slightly before

removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh

when the cap is opened.

When installing the cap, turn the cap

clockwise until you hear a click. When

you hear the click, the cap is fully

closed.

If the cap is not tightened securely, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on.

Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

DMake sure the cap is tightened se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

DUse only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed

to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, apply

force only in the turning direction to

the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the

switches between the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed

by hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the

“Ɯ” (rear) side.

The roof will open and stop partway 135

mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened posi-

tion. When you push “Ɯ” (rear) side

again, the moon roof will open fully. To

stop the roof partway, push the same side

or “Ɲ” (front) side while the roof is mov-

ing.

As driving with the moon roof opened fully

will cause wind throbs, we recommend

you to drive with the moon roof partway

135 mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened

position.

The sun shade will be opened together

with the roof.

To close: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the

“Ɲ” (front) side.

The roof will fully close. To stop the roof

partway, push the same side or “Ɯ” (rear)

side briefly.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the “TILT” switch on the

“UP” side.

To lower: Push the “TILT” switch on the

opposite side of “UP”.

You may stop the moon roof at any de-

sired position. The roof will move while

the switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

Key off operation: If all the doors are

closed, it works for 43 seconds even after

the ignition switch is turned off. It stops

working when any of the doors is opened.

Jam protection function: If something

gets caught between the moon roof and

frame during closing operation, the moon

roof stops and opens half way.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

Electric moon roof

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

DWhile the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other

parts of the bodies of all occupants

away from the roof opening. Other-

wise, they could be seriously in-

jured if the vehicle stops suddenly

or if the vehicle is involved in an

accident.

DBefore you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody

around the moon roof. You must

also make sure nobody places his

or her head, hands and other parts

of the body in the roof opening. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in the closing roof, it could

result in a serious injury. When

anyone closes the moon roof, first

make sure it is safe to do so.

DBe sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the moon roof switches and get

trapped in the roof opening. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

DNever sit on top of the vehicle

around the roof opening.

DNever try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

DThe jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Occupant restraint systems

Seats 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Swing−up rear seats 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tumbling rear seats 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Armrest 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat heaters 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Passenger airbag manual on−off switch 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front passenger occupant classification system 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child restraint 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-

hicle occupants should have the seatback

upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-

erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

DDo not drive the vehicle unless the

occupants are properly seated. Do

not allow any passengers to sit on

top of a folded−down seatback, or

in the luggage compartment or car-

go area. Persons not properly

seated and/or not properly re-

strained by seat belts can be se-

verely injured in the event of emer-

gency braking or a collision.

DDuring driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move

around between seats. Otherwise,

severe injuries can occur in the

event of emergency braking or a

collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if

the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag

is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10

in.) from your driver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety.

This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your

breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in sever-

al ways:

DMove your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

DSlightly recline the back of the

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250

mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the

seat somewhat. If reclining the back

of your seat makes it hard to see

the road, raise yourself by using a

firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

DIf your steering wheel is adjustable,

tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of

your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-

ommended by NHTSA above, while

still maintaining control of the foot

pedals, steering wheel, and your view

of the instrument panel controls.

Seats

Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Front passenger seats

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury es-

pecially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving as the seat may

unexpectedly move and cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DAfter adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

DDo not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere

with the seat−lock mechanism or

unexpectedly push up the seat posi-

tion adjusting lever and the seat

may suddenly move, causing the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

DWhile adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near

the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands or fingers may be caught and

injured. Non−split bench seat

—Seat adjustment precautions

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Separate seat and split bench seat

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Non−split bench seat: Pull the lever up.

Then slide the seat to the desired posi-

tion with slight body pressure and re-

lease the lever.

Separate seat and split bench seat:

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTING

LEVER

Pull up or push down the lever.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or personal injury.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION

ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at

that position.

Do not place anything under the front

seats, as this might interfere with the seat

movement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-

back at that position.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either way.

The amount of lumbar support will change

while the switch is pushed.

—Adjusting front seats (power

seats)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

For easy access to the rear seat, do

this.

Lift the seatback angle adjusting lever or

press the pedal behind the seatback.

The seatback will tilt forward.

After passengers are in, lift up the seat-

back until it locks.

CAUTION

DAfter putting back the seatback, try

pushing the seatback forward and

rearward to make sure it is secured

in place.

DNever allow anyone to rest their

foot on the press pedal while the

vehicle is moving.

Pull the seatback lock release lever and

fold down the seatback.

Hold the lever until you have swung the

seatback forward slightly.

—Tilting passenger’s seatback

for rear seat entry

(access cab models)

—Folding seatback

(non−split bench seat)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Make sure the shoulder belt pass

through the guide when returning the

seatback.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to the

upright position, observe the follow-

ing precautions in order to prevent

personal injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

DMake sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the belt buckles from falling

out when you swing up the rear seat.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you swing up the rear seat.

Swing−up rear seats

(access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. Raise the bottom cushion while

pushing the lock release lever.

CAUTION

When returning the bottom cushion to

its original position, observe the fol-

lowing precautions in order to pre-

vent personal injury in a collision or

sudden stop:

DMake sure the bottom cushion is

securely locked by trying to pull up

the edge of the bottom cushion.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the bottom

cushion and are arranged in their

proper position and are ready to

use.

BEFORE TUMBLING REAR SEATS

Stow the rear seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out

when you tumble the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you tumble the rear seat.

Tumbling rear seats

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TUMBLING REAR SEATS

1. Lower the head restraints to the low-

est position. Fold down the seatback

while pulling the seatback angle ad-

justing lever and swing the whole

seat up and forward while pulling

the seat lock release lever on the

side.

To return the tumbled seat to the original

position, reverse the above operation.

CAUTION

DMake sure people or luggage are

clear of the seat. Then, hold the

seat and slowly move it. Otherwise,

people may be injured or luggage

may be damaged, if the seat hits

them.

DTo avoid serious injury, do not sit

on the folded seatback.

DUse the seat lock release lever on

the side only when tumbling the

seat. 2. Take the holding strap out of its

hole, and hook the strap onto the

assist grip. Then, pull the strap on

the free end to secure the seat.

When returning the rear seat to its original

position, put the holding strap into the

hole.

CAUTION

When tumbling the rear seats, fix the

seats securely by adjusting the length

of the holding strap. Failure to do so

may cause an unexpected accident or

severe injury in the event of emergen-

cy braking or a collision.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

WHEN RETURNING THE REAR SEATS

If you cannot raise the seatback be-

cause of the locked seat belt, do not

try it forcibly. Release the lock of the

seat belt in the following way. Push in

the lower front edge of the seatback

cushion to slacken the seat belt (1) and

let the seat belt retract a little (2).

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-

cautions in order to prevent personal

injury in a collision or sudden stop:

DBe careful not to get your hands or

feet pinched in the seat.

DMake sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback or

by trying to pull up the edge of the

bottom cushion. Failure to do so

will prevent the seat belt from oper-

ating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

Front (separate seat and non−split bench

seat)

Front (split bench seat)

Head restraints

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Rear

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the

lock release button.

Center head restraint—When an occupant

sits on the center position of the seats,

always pull up the center head restraint to

the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when

it is close to your head. Therefore, using

a cushion on the seatback is not recom-

mended.

CAUTION

DAdjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the

top of your ears.

DAfter adjusting the head restraint,

make sure it is locked in position.

DDo not drive with the head re-

straints removed.

Non−split bench seat

Split bench seat

Armrest

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Separate seat

To use the armrest, do this.

Non−split and split bench seat—Pull the

armrest out as shown in the illustration.

Separate seat—Pull the armrest down as

shown in the illustration.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,

avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, push the

switch (“L” switch for the left front

seat and “R” switch for the right seat).

At this time, the indicator light will illu-

minate to indicate the seat heater is

operating.

The seat heater switches have the follow-

ing positions.

“HI”—High heating temperature

“LO”—Low heating temperature

The key must be in the “ON” position to

operate seat heaters.

Pushing lightly on the opposite side will

turn it off.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-

erating the seat heater because it

may make them feel too hot or cause

burns at low temperatures (erythema,

varicella). Use extra caution for;

DBabies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with

physical disabilities

DPersons who have delicate skin

DPersons who are exhausted

DPerson who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping

drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do

not use the seat heater with a blan-

ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-

jects which cover the seat.

Seat heaters

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and

passengers in the vehicle be properly re-

strained at all times with the seat belts

provided. Failure to do so could increase

the chance of injury and/or the severity of

injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle

are designed for people of adult size,

large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-

propriate for the child until the child be-

comes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”

in this Section for details.

STANDARD CAB MODELS—

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the seat

and must be restrained using the vehicle’s

seat belt.

ACCESS CAB AND DOUBLE CAB

MODELS—

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an

accident occurs and the seat belts are not

worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the airbag may cause death or

serious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An

unrestrained child could suffer serious in-

jury or death during emergency braking or

a collision. Also, do not let the child sit

on your lap. Holding a child in your arms

does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for

specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips and not on the

waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-

ry, first check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats

properly wearing their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely

to suffer serious bodily injury or

death in the event of sudden braking

or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe

the following:

DUse the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for

two or more people—even children.

DAvoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

driver and the front passenger are

sitting up straight and well back in

the seats. If you are reclined, the

lap belt may slide past your hips

and apply restraint forces directly

to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt. In the

event of a frontal collision, the

more the seat is reclined, the great-

er the risk of death or personal in-

jury.

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DBe careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that

they do not get caught or pinched

in the seat or side doors.

DInspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Damaged parts should be re-

placed. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

DKeep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Never

use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-

ers, or allow them to come into

contact with the belt—they may se-

verely weaken the belts. (See

“Cleaning the interior” in Section

5.)

DReplace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a

severe impact. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up

straight and well back in the seat. To

fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-

tractor and insert the tab into the

buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts

to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a

sudden stop or on impact. It also may

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A

slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and is then retracted

even slightly, the belt is locked in that

position and cannot be extended. This fea-

ture is used to hold the child restraint

system securely. (For details, see “Child

restraint” in this Section.) To free the belt

again, fully retract the belt and then pull

the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release

it. You will then be able to smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from injury.

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Take up slack

Too h ig h

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-

just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder

portion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause seri-

ous injuries due to sliding under

the lap belt during a collision or

other unintended event. Keep the

lap belt positioned as low on hips

as possible.

DDo not place the shoulder belt un-

der your arm.

Standard and double cab models

Access cab models

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder

anchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to

your size.

Standard and double cab models—

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button

and slide the anchor down.

Access cab models—

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Pull the lock release knob and

slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor is

locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

your shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from your neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of

protection in an accident and cause

severe injuries in a collision.

To release the belt, press the buckle

release button and allow the belt to

retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull

it out and check for kinks or twists. Then

make sure it remains untwisted as it re-

tracts.

FRONT CENTER SEAT BELT (standard

cab models with non−split bench seat)

AND REAR CENTER SEAT BELT (access

cab models)

The center seat belt is a 3−point type

restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt

buckles must be correctly located and se-

curely latched for proper operation.

Make sure buckle 1 (with light gray

buckle−release button) is securely latched

for ready use of the center seat belt.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Front center seat belt only—

Make sure the shoulder belt pass

through the guide when using the seat

belt for front center seat.

Two buckles and tabs for center seat

belt

The 2 buckles for the center seat belt are

distinguished with colors of the buckle re-

lease button. Also the 2 tabs have differ-

ent shape for its end so that the belt is

not buckled in the wrong place.

Buckle 1 (with light gray buckle−re-

lease button)—Properly matches with

concave end tab

Buckle 2 (with red buckle−release but-

ton)—Properly matches with round end

tab

CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-

rectly located and securely latched.

Failure to properly match the buckle

and tab may cause severe injury in

case of an accident or a collision.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To release the concave end tab, insert the

key into the hole on buckle 1 (with light

gray buckle−release button) and allow the

belt to retract.

CAUTION

Do not use the center seat belt with

either buckle released. Fastening only

the shoulder belt or lap belt may

cause severe personal injury in case

of sudden braking or a collision.

The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed before

you swing up the bottom cushion. (See

“Swing−up rear seats” in this Section.)

—Stowing the rear seat belt

buckles (access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed before

you fold the seatback. (See “Tumbling rear

seats” in this Section.)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-

curely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Toyota dealer free of

charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer to

order the proper required length for the

extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-

pect to wear for proper measurement and

selection of length. Additional ordering in-

formation is available at your Toyota deal-

er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to follow these instructions

could reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt restraint system in case of

an accident, increasing the chance of

personal injury.

DRemember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when

used on a different vehicle, for

another person, or at a different

seating position than the one origi-

nally intended.

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

—Stowing the rear seat belt

buckles (double cab models) —Seat belt extender

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DVehicles with separate seat—Make

sure the front passenger occupant

classification indicator light indi-

cates “ON” when using the seat

belt extender for the front passen-

ger seat. If the indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-

er tongue from the seat belt buckle,

then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-

nect the seat belt extender after

making sure the indicator light indi-

cates “ON”. If you use the seat belt

extender while the indicator light

indicates “OFF”, the front passen-

ger airbag and side airbag on the

front passenger side may not acti-

vate correctly, which could cause

death or serious injury in the event

of collision.

DBe sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you

can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on

the buckle release buttons of the ex-

tender and the seat belt are both facing

outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle release button on the extender,

not on the seat belt. This helps prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Vehicles with separate seat—As far as the

seat belt extender on the front passenger

side is concerned, do not fail to discon-

nect the extender from the seat belt after

the above operation in order to activate

the front passenger airbag correctly when

getting into the vehicle next time.

When not in use, remove the extender

and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt and the seat belt extend-

er are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from injury.

The driver and front passenger seat

belt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in response to a severe fron-

tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal

impact, the front seat belts are quickly

drawn back by the retractors so that the

belts snugly restrain the occupants.

Vehicles with bench seat—The seat belt

pretensioners are activated even with no

passenger in the front seat.

Vehicles with separate seat—The front

passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not

activate if no passenger is detected in the

front passenger seat by the front passen-

ger occupant classification system. How-

ever, the front passenger’s seat belt pre-

tensioner may activate if luggage is put

on the seat, or the seat belt is buckled

up regardless of the presence of an occu-

pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-

ger occupant classification system, see

“Front passenger occupant classification

system” in this Section.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-

bags may not operate together in all colli-

sions.

—Seat belt pretensioners

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Double cab models only—The seat belt

pretensioners will not operate in a vehicle

rollover if the “RSCA OFF” indicator light

is on. For details, see “Roll sensing of

curtain shield airbags off switch” in this

Section.

The seat belt pretensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components

and their locations are shown in the il-

lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification indicator light

3. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification system (ECU

and sensors)

4. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

6. Airbag sensor assembly

7. SRS warning light

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled

by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag

sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-

sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise may be heard

and a small amount of non−toxic gas may

be released. This does not indicate that

a fire is occurring. This gas is normally

harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have

been activated, the seat belt retractors

remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open

the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,

airbag sensor or surrounding area or

wiring. Failure to follow these instruc-

tions may prevent the seat belt pre-

tensioners from activating correctly,

cause sudden operation of the system

or disable the system, which could

result in death or serious injury. Con-

sult your Toyota dealer about any re-

pair and modification.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

seat belt pretensioners in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zRepairs on or near the front seat

belt pretensioner assemblies

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure or con-

sole

Without tachometer

With tachometer

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the seat belt pretensioners are

operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

passenger airbag manual on−off switch,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring

and power sources. (For details, see “Ser-

vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-

ers” in Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DIf any seat belt does not retract or can

not be pulled out due to a malfunction

or activation of the relevant seat belt

pretensioner.

DThe seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

DEither seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) airbags are designed to provide

further protection for the driver and

right front passenger in addition to the

primary safety protection provided by

the seat belts.

Vehicles with bench seat—The SRS air-

bags are designed to protect the driver

and right front passenger and they are not

designed to protect an occupant in the

front center seating position.

SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag (standard

and access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS airbags work together with the

seat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-

ing. The SRS airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

head or chest caused by hitting the ve-

hicle interior.

Vehicles with bench seat—The SRS front

passenger airbag is activated even with

no passenger in the front seat.

Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS

front passenger airbag will not activate if

there is no passenger sitting in the front

passenger seat. However, the front pas-

senger airbag may deploy if luggage is

put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled

up, regardless of the presence of an oc-

cupant in the seat. (As for the front pas-

senger occupant classification system, see

“Front passenger occupant classification

system” in this Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver and front

passenger seat belt systems. The

driver and front passenger can be

killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” in this Section.

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seat of the vehicle and proper-

ly restrained. The rear seat is the

safest for infants and children. For

instructions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” in this Section.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Indicator

light

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission

Indicator

light

For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission

The passenger airbag system is

equipped with a manual on−off switch

and indicator light. Turning the passen-

ger airbag manual on−off switch clock-

wise to the “ON” or “AUTO” position

makes the passenger airbag system op-

erational. To disable the passenger air-

bag system, turn the manual on−off

switch counterclockwise to the “OFF”

position and remove the key. The indi-

cator light on the passenger airbag

manual on−off switch will come on

when the passenger airbag system has

been disabled.

See “Passenger airbag manual on−off

switch” in this Section for detail.

CAUTION

DDo not turn off the passenger air-

bag manual on−off switch except

when a member of a passenger risk

group identified in TABLE 1 is oc-

cupying the right front passenger

seating position.

DWhen the passenger airbag manual

on−off switch is turned off, the pas-

senger airbag will not inflate in a

collision and turning off the pas-

senger airbag can reduce the occu-

pant protection which your vehicle

safety systems can provide to you

in certain accidents and increase

the likelihood of death or serious

personal injuries.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The SRS airbags are designed to deploy

in severe (usually frontal) collisions

where the magnitude and duration of

the forward deceleration of the vehicle

exceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS airbags will deploy if the severi-

ty of the impact is above the designed

threshold level, comparable to an approxi-

mate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the

vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed

barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS airbags and front seat

belt pretensioners may not activate togeth-

er.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because:

DVehicle has no rear seat;

DVehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear−facing infant seat;

DThe infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician,

makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver

can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:

DVehicle has no rear seat:

DAlthough children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible,

children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is

available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or

DThe child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician,

makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can

constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his

or her physician:

DCauses the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and

DMakes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the

potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if

belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash.

For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please

contact NHTSA at 1−800−424−9393 or Transport Canada at 1−800−333−0371.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS airbags are generally not de-

signed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS airbags may oc-

cur.

Hitting a curb,

edge of pavement

or hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over a

deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS airbags may also deploy if a

serious impact occurs to the underside

of your vehicle. Some examples are

shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system consists mainly of

the following components, and their loca-

tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light or passenger airbag on−

off indicator light

3. Airbag module for right front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

4. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification system (ECU

and sensors)

5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

7. Driver’s seat position sensor

8. For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission—Passenger airbag manual on−

off switch

9. Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission—Passenger airbag manual

on−off switch

10. Airbag sensor assembly

11. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

12. SRS warning light

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-

tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.

If an impact results in a forward decelera-

tion beyond the designed threshold level,

the system triggers the airbag inflators. At

this time a chemical reaction in the infla-

tors very quickly fills the airbags with

non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward

motion of the occupants. The airbags then

quickly deflate, so that there is no ob-

struction of the driver’s vision should it be

necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

DThe driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

DThe front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

DAll vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” in this

Section.

CAUTION

A member of a passenger risk group

should never sit or be occupied in

the front outside passenger seat with

airbag manual on−off switch in the

“ON” or “AUTO” position. (For de-

tails, see “SRS driver airbag and

front passenger airbag” in this Sec-

tion.)

DDo not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DToyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

DVehicles with bench seat—Do not

allow a child to stand up or kneel

on the front passenger seat, since

the front passenger airbag could in-

flate with considerable speed and

force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

DDo not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” in this Section.

DDo not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the airbag system. They

might restrict inflation or cause

death or serious injury as they are

projected rearward by the force of

the deploying airbags. Likewise, the

driver and front passenger should

not hold objects in their arms or on

their knees.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DDo not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag cover, front

passenger airbag or airbag sensor

assembly. Doing so may prevent the

front airbag system from activating

correctly, cause sudden activation

of the system or disable the sys-

tem, which could result in death or

serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS front

airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS airbag system in some cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel or dashboard near the front

passenger airbag

Without tachometer

With tachometer

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS airbags are operating

properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

passenger airbag manual on−off switch,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring

and power sources. (For details, see “Ser-

vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-

ers” in Section 1−6.)

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS

warning light will come on and front pas-

senger occupant classification indicator

light will indicate “OFF” if there is a mal-

function in the front passenger occupant

classification system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe SRS airbags have been inflated.

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS airbags to inflate.

DThe pad section of the steering wheel

or front passenger airbag cover

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) airbags are designed to provide

further protection for the driver and

front passenger in addition to the pri-

mary safety protection provided by the

seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work together with

the seat belts to help reduce injury by

inflating. The SRS front airbags help re-

duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front

passenger’s head or chest caused by hit-

ting the vehicle interior.

Vehicles with split bench seat—The SRS

front passenger airbag is activated even

with no passenger in the front seat.

Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS

front passenger airbag will not activate if

there is no passenger sitting in the front

passenger seat. However, the front pas-

senger airbag may deploy if luggage is

put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled

up, regardless of the presence of an oc-

cupant in the seat. (As for the front pas-

senger occupant classification system, see

“Front passenger occupant classification

system” in this Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems.

The driver and front passenger can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” in this Section.

SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seat of the vehicle and proper-

ly restrained. The rear seat is the

safest for infants and children. For

instructions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” in this Section.

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and the

seat belt pretensioners may not activate

together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over

a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists

mainly of the following components, and

their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification indicator light

3. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

4. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification system (ECU

and sensors)

5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

7. Driver’s seat position sensor

8. Airbag sensor assembly

9. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

10. SRS warning light

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-

tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.

If an impact results in a forward decelera-

tion beyond the designed threshold level,

the system triggers the airbag inflators. At

this time a chemical reaction in the infla-

tors very quickly fills the airbags with

non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward

motion of the occupants. The airbags then

quickly deflate, so that there is no ob-

struction of the driver’s vision should it be

necessary to continue driving.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

DThe driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

DThe front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

DAll vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” in this

Section.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DDo not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

DToyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

DVehicles with split bench seat—Do

not allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger seat,

since the front passenger airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, the

child may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DDo not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” in this Section.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DDo not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the airbag system. They

might restrict inflation or cause

death or serious injury as they are

projected rearward by the force of

the deploying airbags. Likewise, the

driver and front passenger should

not hold objects in their arms or on

their knees.

DDo not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag cover, front

passenger airbag or airbag sensor

assembly. Doing so may prevent the

front airbag system from activating

correctly, cause sudden activation

of the system or disable the sys-

tem, which could result in death or

serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS front

airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-

terfere with proper operation of the

SRS front airbag system in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel or dashboard near the front

passenger airbag

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS front airbags are oper-

ating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring

and power sources. (For details, see “Ser-

vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-

ers” in Section 1−6.)

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS

warning light will come on and front pas-

senger occupant classification indicator

light will indicate “OFF” if there is a mal-

function in the front passenger occupant

classification system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS front airbags to inflate.

DThe pad section of the steering wheel

or front passenger airbag cover

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Indicator

light

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission

Indicator

light

For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission

This on−off switch is designed to dis-

able the passenger airbag in order to

allow usage, if necessary, of a member

of a passenger risk group identified in

TABLE 1 is occupying the right front

passenger seating position. (For details,

see “SRS driver airbag and front pas-

senger airbag” in this Section.)

Operate on−off switch as follows:

Insert key into the keyhole.

To turn passenger airbag on—

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission: Turn the key clockwise to

the “ON” position. At this time, the “ON”

indicator light comes on.

For separate seat with automatic transmis-

sion: Turn the key clockwise to the

“AUTO” position. At this time, the indicator

light condition varies depending on the oc-

cupant in the right front seat. (For details,

see “Front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system” in the Section.)

To turn passenger airbag off—Turn the

key counterclockwise to the “OFF” position

and remove it. At this time, the “OFF”

indicator light comes on. If the key is

removed at any other position than “OFF”,

the switch will automatically return to the

“ON” or “AUTO” position.

Passenger airbag manual

on−off switch (standard cab

and access cab models only)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

The SRS warning light and the front

passenger occupant classification indi-

cator light or passenger airbag manual

on−off indicator light will indicate

“OFF” if there is a malfunction in the

passenger airbag manual on−off switch.

CAUTION

DDo not turn off the passenger air-

bag manual on−off switch except

when a member of a passenger risk

group identified in TABLE 1 is oc-

cupying the right front passenger

seating position.

DWhen the passenger airbag manual

on−off switch is turned off, the pas-

senger airbag will not inflate in a

collision and turning off the pas-

senger airbag can reduce the occu-

pant protection which your vehicle

safety systems can provide to you

in certain accidents and increase

the likelihood of serious personal

injuries.

For details, see “SRS driver airbag

and front passenger airbag” in this

Section.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags are designed to provide further

protection for the driver, front passen-

ger and rear outside passengers in

addition to the primary safety protec-

tion provided by the seat belts.

SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

In response to a severe side impact, the

SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags work with the seat belts to help

reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side

airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the

driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the

SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce

injuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-

senger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.

Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS

side airbag on the passenger seat will not

activate if there is no passenger sitting in

the front passenger seat. However, the

side airbag on the passenger seat may

deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the

seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the

presence of an occupant in the seat. (As

for the front passenger occupant classifi-

cation system, see “Front passenger occu-

pant classification system” in this Sec-

tion.)

Roll sensing function:

In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-

tain shield airbags on both sides work

with the seat belts to help reduce injury

by inflating. The curtain shield airbags

help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s

or front passenger’s head and help pre-

vent them from being thrown out of the

vehicle. (This function can be turned off

if inflation is not desired. See “Roll sens-

ing of curtain shield airbags off switch” in

this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-

senger side are activated even with no

passenger in the front seat or rear outside

seat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-

vate even when the side airbags are not

activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver, front

passenger and rear outside passen-

ger seat belt systems. To ensure

maximum protection in an accident,

the driver and all passengers in the

vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly. Wearing a seat belt prop-

erly during an accident reduces the

chances of death or serious injury

or being thrown out of the vehicle.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seat belt system,

see “Seat belts” in this Section.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DDo not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the

seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof

side rail from which the SRS side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

deploy even if he/she is a child

seated in the child restraint system.

It is dangerous if the SRS side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the occupant.

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and prop-

erly restrained. The rear seats are

the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” in this

Section.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from

the side at certain angles, or a collision

to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment as

shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side.

The curtain shield airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side or vehicle rollover.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a front or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed side collision.

The angle of

vehicle tip−up

is manual

Skidding vehicle

hitting a curb

stone

The curtain shield airbags may inflate

if the angle of vehicle tip−up is margin-

al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit

a curb stone laterally as shown in the

illustration.

Collision from

the front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are not gen-

erally designed to inflate if the vehicle

is involved in a front or rear collision,

if it pitches end over end, or if it is

involved in a low−speed side collision.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over

a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

may deploy if a serious impact occurs

to the underside of your vehicle. Some

examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system consists mainly of the fol-

lowing components, and their locations are

shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification indicator light

3. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

4. Separate seat only—Front passenger

occupant classification system (ECU

and sensors)

5. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

9. Airbag sensor assembly

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system is controlled by the airbag

sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-

sembly consists of a safing sensor and

airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and

curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the

curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the

side airbag inflators and/or the curtain

shield airbag inflators. At this time a

chemical reaction in the inflators quickly

fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help

restrain the lateral motion of the occu-

pants.

In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor

assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag

inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction

in the inflators quickly fills the airbags

with non−toxic gas to help restrain the

lateral motion of the occupants.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

fairly loud noise and release some smoke

and residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, it may also cause minor burns or

abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front

and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be

hot for several minutes, but the airbags

themselves will not be hot. The airbags

are designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable

force. To reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury when they in-

flate, the driver, front passenger and

rear outside passengers must:

DWear their seat belts properly.

DRemain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats

at all times.

DDo not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,

since the side airbag and curtain

shield airbag could inflate with con-

siderable speed and force. Other-

wise, he/she may be killed or seri-

ously injured. Special care should

be taken especially when you have

a small child in the vehicle.

DSit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly

in the seat. Do not apply excessive

weight to the outer side of the

seats with a side airbag, and to the

front pillar, rear pillar and roof side

rail with a curtain shield airbag.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DMake sure the “RSCA OFF” indica-

tor light is off. The curtain shield

airbags will not inflate in a vehicle

rollover if this indicator light is on

and you may be killed or seriously

injured. For details, see “Roll sens-

ing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” in this Section.

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the

side airbag and curtain shield air-

bag inflate, since these airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

DDo not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the pas-

senger’s side door, since the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows

since the curtain shield airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

DDo not attach a cup holder or any

other device or object on or around

the door. When the side airbag in-

flates, the cup holder or any other

device or object will be thrown with

great force or the side airbag may

not activate correctly, resulting in

death or serious injury. Likewise,

the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

DDo not attach a microphone or any

other device or object around the

area where the curtain shield airbag

activates such as on the windshield

glass, side door glass, front and

rear pillars, roof side rail and assist

grips. When the curtain shield air-

bag inflates, the microphone or oth-

er device or object will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DDo not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat

hook. If the curtain shield airbag

inflates, those items will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury. When you hang clothes,

hang them on the coat hook direct-

ly.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such changes may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

DDo not disassemble or repair the

front and rear pillars and roof side

rails containing the curtain shield

airbags. Such changes may disable

the system or cause the curtain

shield airbags to inflate accidental-

ly, resulting in death or serious in-

jury.

DDo not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the curtain shield airbags to inflate

accidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

in Section 7−2.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS side

airbags and curtain shield airbags op-

eration.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system in some cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the side structure of

the passenger compartment

zRepairs made on or near the con-

sole or front seat

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator

light, interconnecting wiring and power

sources. (For details, see “Service remind-

er indicators and warning buzzers” in Sec-

tion 1−6.)

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

Vehicles with separate seat only—The

SRS warning light will come on and front

passenger occupant classification indicator

light will indicate “OFF” if there is a mal-

function in the front passenger occupant

classification system.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DAny of the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags have been inflated.

DThe portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

DThe surface of the seats with the side

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

DThe portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-

ding) containing the curtain shield air-

bags inside (shaded in the illustration)

is scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem. This system detects the conditions

1—4 in the table and based on these

conditions activates or deactivates front

passenger airbags. The system moni-

tors the weight and load on the front

passenger seat, and the seat belt

buckle switch to determine conditions

1—4. In order for the system to detect

the conditions correctly, do not do any

of the following.

DPut a heavy load on the front passen-

ger seat.

DAttach a seatback table to the front

passenger seatback.

DPut weight on the front passenger by

putting your hands or feet on the front

passenger seatback from the rear pas-

senger seat.

The front passenger occupant classifi-

cation indicator light indicates the ac-

tuation of the front passenger airbag,

side airbag on the front passenger seat

and front passenger’s seat belt preten-

sioner.

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position with the condition 2 in the table

shown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system determines that a person of

adult size sits in the front passenger seat

but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one

of the following is likely to have occurred:

Front passenger occupant

classification system (separate

seat only)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DA rear passenger lifts the front passen-

ger seat cushion with their legs.

DObjects are placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

DThe front passenger seatback is in

contact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects an

adult sitting in the front passenger seat,

make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-

minated when an adult is seated in the

front passenger seat. If the “OFF” indica-

tor is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit

up straight, well back in the seat, and

with the seat belt worn correctly. If the

“OFF” indicator still remains illuminated,

either ask the passenger to move to the

rear seat, or if that is not possible, move

the front passenger seat fully rearward.

The front passenger occupant classifi-

cation indicator light will indicate “ON”

and “OFF” when the ignition key is

turned to the “ON” position. After

about four seconds, it will go off. After

that, the front passenger occupant clas-

sification system operates and judges

whether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.

Without tachometer

With tachometer

The SRS warning light will come on

and front passenger occupant classifi-

cation indicator light will indicate

“OFF” if there is a malfunction in the

front passenger occupant classification

system.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

100

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Access cab models

Condition detected by

the front passenger

occupant classification

system

Passenger

airbag on−off

switch position

Indicator/warning light Devices

Front passenger

occupant

classification

indicator light

SRS warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder light

Front passenger

airbag

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

1. Adult∗1“AUTO” “ON” Off Flashing∗4Activated Activated

“OFF” “OFF” Deactivated

2. Child∗2 or child

restraint system∗3

“AUTO” “OFF” Off Flashing∗4Deactivated Activated

“OFF”

3. Unoccupied “AUTO” Not illuminated Off Off Deactivated

“OFF” “OFF”

4. There is a

malfunction in the

system

“AUTO”

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

“OFF”

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may

recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her

as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be

installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” in this Section as for installing the child restraint

system.)

∗4:

In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

101

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Double cab models

Condition detected by

the front passenger

occupant classification

system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Front

passenger

occupant

classification

indicator light

SRS warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder light

Front

passenger

airbag

Side airbag

on the front

passenger

seat

Curtain shield

airbag in the

front

passenger

side

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

1. Adult∗1“ON” Off Flashing∗4Activated

2. Child∗2 or child

restraint system∗3“OFF” Off Flashing∗4Deactivated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not

illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is a

malfunction in the

system

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may

recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her

as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be

installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” in this Section as for installing the child restraint

system.)

∗4:

In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

102

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or serious

injury when the front passenger occu-

pant classification system does not

detect the conditions correctly, ob-

serve the following.

DMake sure the front passenger oc-

cupant classification indicator light

indicates “ON” when using the seat

belt extender for the front passen-

ger seat. If the indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-

er tongue from the seat belt buckle,

then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-

nect the seat belt extender after

making sure the indicator light indi-

cates “ON”. If you use the seat belt

extender while the indicator light

indicates “OFF”, the front passen-

ger airbag and side airbag on the

front passenger side may not acti-

vate correctly, which could cause

death or serious injury in the event

of collision.

DDo not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a

rear seat. This may cause the

“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,

which indicates that the passen-

ger’s airbags will not deploy in the

event of a severe accident. If the

seatback touches the rear seat, re-

turn the seatback to a position

where it does not touches the rear

seat.

Keep the front passenger seatback

as upright as possible when the ve-

hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-

back excessively may lessen the ef-

fectiveness of the seat belt system.

DIf an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the occupant classification

indicator light should indicate “ON”.

If the “OFF” indicator is illumina-

ted, ask the passenger to sit up

straight, well back in the seat, feet

on the floor, and with the seat belt

worn correctly. If the “OFF” indica-

tor still remains illuminated, either

ask the passenger to move to the

rear seat, or if that is not possible,

move the front passenger seat fully

rearward.

DWear the seat belt properly.

DMake sure the front passenger’s

seat belt tab has not been left in-

serted into the buckle before some-

one sits in the front passenger

seat.

DDo not put a heavy load in the

front passenger seatback pocket or

attach a seatback table to the front

passenger seat seatback.

DDo not put weight on the front pas-

senger seat by putting your hands

or feet on the front passenger seat

seatback from the rear passenger

seat.

DDo not let a rear passenger lift the

front passenger seat with their feet

or press on the seatback with their

legs.

DDo not put objects under the front

passenger seat.

DChild restraint systems installed on

the rear seat should not contact the

front seatbacks.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

103

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DWhen it is unavoidable to install the

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front passenger seat,

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the

proper order. (As for the installation

order, see “—Installation with seat

belt” in this Section.)

DDo not remove the front seats.

DDo not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.

Otherwise, the SRS warning light

may come on to indicate a malfunc-

tion of the detection system. In this

case, contact your Toyota dealer im-

mediately.

The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion indicator light may indicate “ON” (the

front passenger airbag and side airbag on

the front passenger seat may deploy)

even if observing the above cautions,

when a child sits in, or a forward−facing

child restraint system is installed on the

front passenger seat. Refer to all the cau-

tions in “SRS driver airbag and front pas-

senger airbag”, “SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags” and “Child restraint”

in this Section.

The roll sensing of curtain shield air-

bags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)

can turn off the curtain shield airbags

and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle

rollover. This switch should only be

used if inflation is not desired (such as

extreme off−road driving).

When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch

for a few seconds with the ignition switch

on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes

on and the roll sensing function is turned

off. When you push the switch again, the

indicator light goes off and the roll sens-

ing function is turned on. (For details

about the roll sensing function, see “SRS

side airbags and curtain shield airbags” in

this Section.)

In a severe side impact, the curtain shield

airbags on impacted side will inflate even

if the roll sensing function is turned off.

(For details about the curtain shield air-

bags, see “SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags” in this Section.)

In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt

pretensioners will work even if the roll

sensing function is turned off. (For details

about the seat belt pretensioners, see

“—Seat belt pretensioners” in this Sec-

tion.)

If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” with the roll sensing function off

and then the ignition switch is turned back

to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn

back on automatically.

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

104

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DBefore normal driving, make sure

the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is

off.

DWhen the roll sensing function is

turned off (and the “RSCA OFF”

indicator light is on), the curtain

shield airbags and seat belt preten-

sioners will not work in a vehicle

rollover. Turning off the curtain

shield airbags and seat belt preten-

sioners reduces occupant protection

which your vehicle safety systems

can provide in accidents and in-

crease the likelihood of death or

serious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-

propriate child restraint systems for

children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.

and Canada now require the use of a

child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” in this

Section for details.

CAUTION

DFor effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a

child must be properly restrained,

using a seat belt or child restraint

system depending on the age and

size of the child. Holding a child in

your arms is not a substitute for a

child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, the child can be crushed

against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

Standard and access cab models—

DSTANDARD CAB MODELS—

Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child.

ACCESS CAB MODELS—

Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

installed on the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, the child

is safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

105

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DNever put infant or child age 1 to

12 in a passenger risk group on the

right front passenger seat with the

passenger airbag manual on−off

switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” posi-

tion. In the event of an accident,

the force of the rapid inflation of

the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child.

If you must put infant or child age

1 to 12 in a passenger risk group

on the right front seat, make sure

that the passenger airbag manual

on−off switch is in the “OFF” posi-

tion with the key removed and that

the indicator light is on. (For de-

tails, see “SRS driver airbag and

front passenger airbag” in this Sec-

tion.)

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

DMake sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer

and that the system is properly se-

cured. If it is not secured properly,

it may cause death or serious injury

to the child in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

Double cab models—

DToyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

installed on the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, the child

is safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

DVehicles with separate seat—Never

install a rear−facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

even if the front passenger occu-

pant classification indicator light in-

dicates “OFF”. In the event of an

accident, the impact of the rapid

inflation of the front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child if the rear−facing

child restraint system is installed

on the front passenger seat.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

106

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DVehicles with separate seat—A for-

ward−facing child restraint system

should be allowed to be installed

on the front passenger seat only

when it is unavoidable. Always

move the seat as far back as pos-

sible even if the front passenger

occupant classification indicator

light indicates “OFF”, because the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

DMake sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer

and that the system is properly se-

cured. If it is not secured properly,

it may cause death or serious injury

to the child in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must

carefully consult the manufacturer’s

instructions which accompany the child

restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child

restraint system following the manufactur-

er’s instructions about the appropriate age

and size of the child for the child restraint

system.

Install the child restraint system correctly

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer. General directions are also

provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be

installed on the rear seat if your vehicle

is equipped with rear seats. According to

accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,

keep it secured with the seat belt or place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent it from in-

juring passengers in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

—Child restraint system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

107

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Child restraint systems are classified into

the following 3 types depending on the

child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

Install the child restraint system following

the instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-

curing the top strap of a child restraint

system.

For instructions about how to use the an-

chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” in

this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-

proved for your vehicle may also be used.

See “—Installation with child restraint low-

er anchorages” in this Section.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Types of child restraint

system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

108

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission

For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front seat with

the passenger airbag manual on−off

switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” posi-

tion. In the event of an accident, the

force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause

death or serious injury to the child if

the rear−facing child system is

installed on the front passenger seat.

—Installation with seat belt

(standard cab models and

access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

109

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission

For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission

When you install a rear−facing child re-

straint system which belongs to a pas-

senger risk group on the right front

seat, turn the passenger airbag manual

on−off switch counterclockwise to the

“OFF” position and remove the key.

(For details, see “SRS driver airbag and

front passenger airbag” in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the

system is off.

CAUTION

If you must install a rear−facing child

restraint system on the right front

seat, make sure that the passenger

airbag manual on−off switch is in the

“OFF” position with the key removed

and that the indicator light is on.

CAUTION

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupants, may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

110

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

111

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the

buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

112

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the child’s age and size.

When installing, follow the manufactur-

er’s instruction about the applicable

child’s age and size as well as direc-

tions for installing the child restraint

system.

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission

For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission

CAUTION

Rear−facing child restraint system:

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front seat with

the passenger airbag manual on−off

switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” posi-

tion. In the event of an accident, the

force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause

death or serious injury to the child if

the rear−facing child system is

installed on the front passenger seat.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

113

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Except for separate seat with automatic

transmission

For separate seat with automatic trans-

mission

When you install a rear−facing child re-

straint system which belongs to a pas-

senger risk group on the right front

seat, turn the passenger airbag manual

on−off switch counterclockwise to the

“OFF” position and remove the key.

(For details, see “SRS driver airbag and

front passenger airbag” in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the

system is off.

CAUTION

If you must install a rear−facing child

restraint system on the right front

seat, make sure that the passenger

airbag manual on−off switch is in the

“OFF” position with the key removed

and that the indicator light is on.

CAUTION

Forward−facing child restraint system:

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem which belongs to a passenger

risk group should never be installed

on the right front passenger seat with

the passenger airbag manual on−off

switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” posi-

tion, because the force of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child in forward

seating position. (For details, see

“SRS driver airbag and front passen-

ger airbag” in this Section.)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

114

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupants, may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

115

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-

tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

116

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

4. To remove the convertible seat, press

the buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

CAUTION

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem which belongs to a passenger

risk group should never be installed

on the front outside passenger seat

with the passenger airbag manual on−

off switch in the “ON” or “AUTO”

position, because the force of the de-

ploying airbag could cause death or

serious injury to the child in forward

seating position. (For details, see

“SRS driver airbag and front passen-

ger airbag” in this Section.)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

117

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run

the lap and shoulder belt through or

around the booster seat and across the

child following the instructions provided

by its manufacturer and insert the tab

into the buckle taking care not to twist

the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” in

this Section for details.

CAUTION

DAlways make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

DFor child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

118

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. To remove the child restraint system,

press the buckle release button and

allow the belt to retract.

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

CAUTION

DVehicles with split bench seat—Nev-

er install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. In the event of an acci-

dent, the force of the rapid inflation

of the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

—Installation with seat belt

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

119

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DVehicles with separate seat—Never

install a rear−facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

even if the front passenger occu-

pant classification indicator light in-

dicates “OFF”. In the event of an

accident, the impact of the rapid

inflation of the front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child if the rear−facing

child restraint system is installed

on the front passenger seat.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupants, may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

120

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

121

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the

buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the age and size of the

child. When installing, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions about the

applicable age and size of the child as

well as directions for installing the

child restraint system.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

122

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Vehicles with separate seat only—

Install the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat only when it is un-

avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a

front passenger occupant classification

system. In order to activate the occupant

classification system correctly, install the

forward−facing child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the following

order:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-

tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to the

rearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat without putting

your weight on the front passenger

seat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat

belt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended. To hold the seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-

tem and secure the child, complying

with the instructions provided by the

child restraint system manufacturer.

The occupant classification indicator light

should indicate “OFF” when the ignition

key is in the “ON” position and the child

is in the child restraint system after fol-

lowing these procedures. The “OFF” indi-

cator indicates the SRS front passenger

airbag and side airbag on the passenger

side will not deploy. If the indicator light

indicates “ON”, remove the child restraint

system and reinstall it with the ignition

key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If

the indicator light still indicates “ON” when

the ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, then the SRS front passenger airbag

and side airbag on the passenger side

may deploy in an accident. Do not drive

the vehicle in this condition. Remove the

child restraint system and contact your

Toyota dealer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

123

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DVehicles with separate seat—Never

install a rear−facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat.

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should only be installed on the

front passenger seat when unavoid-

able. If you must install the child

restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat, put the seat in its

most rearward position, and install

the forward−facing child restraint

system in the proper order. Other-

wise, the front passenger occupant

classification system can not detect

the presence of the child restraint

system and the front passenger air-

bag and side airbag on the front

passenger seat could deploy.

DVehicles with split bench seat—Nev-

er install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. In the event of an acci-

dent, the force of the rapid inflation

of the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

DVehicles with separate seat—Never

install a rear−facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

even if the front passenger occu-

pant classification indicator light in-

dicates “OFF”. In the event of an

accident, the impact of the rapid

inflation of the front passenger air-

bag could cause death or serious

injury to the child if the rear−facing

child restraint system is installed

on the front passenger seat.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

124

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Move seat fully back

DVehicles with split bench seat—A

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DVehicles with separate seat—A for-

ward−facing child restraint system

should be allowed to be installed

on the front passenger seat only

when it is unavoidable. Always

move the seat as far back as pos-

sible even if the front passenger

occupant classification indicator

light indicates “OFF”, because the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupants, may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

125

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-

tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

126

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press

the buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

127

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

Move seat fully back

CAUTION

DVehicles with split bench seat—A

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DVehicles with separate seat—A for-

ward−facing child restraint system

should be allowed to be installed

on the front passenger seat only

when it is unavoidable. Always

move the seat as far back as pos-

sible even if the front passenger

occupant classification indicator

light indicates “OFF”, because the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

128

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run

the lap and shoulder belt through or

around the booster seat and across the

child following the instructions provided

by its manufacturer and insert the tab

into the buckle taking care not to twist

the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” in

this Section for details.

CAUTION

DAlways make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

DFor child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

129

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. To remove the child restraint system,

press the buckle−release button and al-

low the belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor bracket on the back panel

to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

passenger seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of

user ready anchor brackets.

—Using a top strap

(standard cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

130

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the passenger head re-

straint.

2. Lightly push down on the top sur-

face of the anchor bracket cover,

then pull it forward to remove.

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” in this

Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

131

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

4. Replace the passenger head re-

straint.

Store any removed covers in a safe place

such as the glove box.

Be sure to replace all covers when the

anchor bracket is not in use.

Outside position

Center position

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

—Using a top strap

(access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

132

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Routing devices

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the routing device on the rear of the

seat back and the anchor bracket on the

side floor to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of

user ready anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

Outside position

1. Remove the head restraint.

Routing device

2. Route the top strap through the

routing device as shown in the il-

lustration.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is not

twisted.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

133

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket on the side floor and tighten

the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” in this

Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

134

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Center position

1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Fold down the cup holder, unfasten

the Velcro that attaches the anchor

bracket cover, and lift the cover.

3. Route the top strap through the slot

on top of the seat, pass the strap

through the seat, then latch the hook

onto the anchor bracket.

Close the cover and return the cup

holder to the original position.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

135

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

4. Move the child restraint system to

the correct position.

Then fix the child restraint system

with the seat belt and tighten the

top strap.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

5. Replace the head restraint. Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

—Using a top strap

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

136

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Anchor brackets

Use one anchor bracket on the back of

rear seats and two anchor brackets on the

floor as shown above to attach the top

strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

rear seating position.

TO USE THE ANCHORAGES:

1. Remove the head restraint.

Outside position

Center position

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

137

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorages

and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” in this

Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

3. Replace the head restraint. Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the front seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

the right side of the seat as shown in the

illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(standard cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

138

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower connec-

tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto

the anchorages and tighten the lower

straps.

Type B—

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-

ages.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

139

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the

seat.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

the outsides of the rear seat as shown in

the illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle. Canada only

Type A

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

140

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower connec-

tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto

the anchorages and tighten the lower

straps.

Type B—

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-

ages.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the

seat.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

141

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Center

Left

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the center and left positions

of the rear seats.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback

for center and left positions of rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

Cap

Covers

Canada only

Type A

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

142

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Cap

Covers

Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower connec-

tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Turn up the covers for left lower

anchorage on the center position of

the seats and for anchorages on the

left side position of the seats, and

remove the cap for the right lower

anchorage of the center position of

the seat as shown in the illustration.

2. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages below the button and cap

in the seat cushion.

3. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto

the anchorages and tighten the lower

straps.

Type B—

1. Turn up the covers for left lower

anchorage on the center position of

the seats and for anchorages on the

left side position of the seat, and

remove the cap for the right lower

anchorage of the center position of

the seat as shown in the illustration.

2. Widen the clearance gap the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages below the button and cap

in the seat cushion.

3. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-

ages.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

143

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never recline the seat.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

144

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

145

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirrors 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun visors 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

146

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, pull the lock

release lever toward you, tilt the steer-

ing wheel to the desired angle and re-

lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-

tion, it will spring up as you release the

lock release lever.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

DAfter adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make

sure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the side of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the outside

rear view mirror on the passenger’s side

because it is a convex mirror. Any object

seen in a convex mirror will look smaller

and farther away than when seen in a flat

mirror.

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

147

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

On some models, when you push the out-

side rear view mirror heater switch or out-

side rear view mirror defogger switch, the

heater panels in the outside rear view

mirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-

face. (See “Back window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers” in Section 1−5 and

“Outside rear view mirror heaters” in Sec-

tion 1−5.)

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the

vehicle and an accident may occur

resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

DOn some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the outside rear view

mirror heater or defogger switch is

on.

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjusted

Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”

(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirror

Push the switch in the desired direc-

tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is

in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not

operate the control or scrape the mir-

ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free

the mirror.

—Power rear view mirror

control

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

148

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear view mirrors can be folded

backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-

ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded

backward. Both the driver and pas-

senger side rear view mirrors must

be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving, operate the lever on the lower

edge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater

clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also

lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

—Folding rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view

mirror

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

149

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−

glare function. The function is designed

to reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving.

When the ignition key is inserted and

turned on, the inside rear view mirror al-

ways turns on in the automatic function

mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you that

the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror

detects light from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, the mirror surface

darkens slightly to reduce the reflected

light.

To turn off the automatic function, push

the “OFF” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,

push the “AUTO” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear

view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it

may take a little longer for the mirror to

darken in response to the detection of

headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−

glare mirror sensors located on both

sides of the mirror, do not touch or

cover the sensors with your finger or

a piece of cloth, etc.

Auto anti−glare inside rear

view mirror

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

150

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swing

down the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swing

down the sun visor, remove it from the

hook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-

tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,

extend the plate at the end of the visor

(to position 3).

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

Sun visors—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

151

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To block the glare from the front when the

main sun visor is swung to the lateral

side (position 2), swing down the sub vi-

sor.

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end of

the sun visor when the visor is in the

position 1. It can cover the anti−glare

inside rear view mirror and obstruct

the rear view.

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down

the sun visor and open the cover.

The vanity light(s) comes on when you

open the cover.

—Vanity mirrors

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

152

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

153

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Lights and Wipers

Headlights and turn signals 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior light 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center interior and personal lights 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition switch and step lights 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo lamp 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirror heaters 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 163. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

154

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

turned off. To turn them on again, turn the

key to the “ON” position or actuate the

headlight switch. If you are going to park

for over one week, make sure the head-

light switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Daytime running light system (on some

models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-

ty when the parking brake is released with

the engine started, even with the light

switch in the “OFF” position. They will not

go off until the ignition switch is turned

off.

To turn on the other exterior lights and

instrument panel lights, twist the knob to

the position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn

the headlights to full intensity for driving

at night.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

Headlights and turn signals

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

155

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out.

To turn on the emergency flashers,

push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn

them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn

other drivers if your vehicle must be

stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-

sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work

when the emergency flashers are operat-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the switch on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is not running.

Emergency flashers

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

156

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

To adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel lights, turn the knob.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist

the band of the headlight/turn signal

lever. They will come on only when the

headlights are on low beam.

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

157

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To turn on the interior light, slide the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any

door is opened. The light goes off when

all the doors are closed.

Standard cab and access cab models only

(with wireless remote control)—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position and all

the door are unlocked using the wireless

remote control transmitter simultaneously,

the lights will come on and remain for

about 30 seconds unless any door is

opened or closed.

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

Interior light Personal lights

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

158

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models—

To turn on the light, push the lens on

your side. To turn the light off, push

the lens once again.

The personal light switch has the following

positions:

“OFF”—Turns the lights off.

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of

the doors are opened.

With wireless remote control—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position and all

the door are unlocked using the wireless

remote control transmitter simultaneously,

the lights will come on and remain for

about 30 seconds unless any door is

opened or closed.

Double cab models—

To turn on the personal light, push the

switch. To turn the light off, push the

switch once again.

Turn the light on when any door is

opened. The light goes off when all the

doors are closed.

Type A

Type B

CENTER INTERIOR LIGHT

Type A—

To turn on the interior light, slide the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the doors is opened. The light remains on

when all the doors are closed.

Type B—

To turn on the interior lights, push the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of

the doors is opened. The light remains on

when all the doors are closed.

“OFF”—The lights are off unless you oper-

ate either outside switch.

Center interior and personal

lights

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

159

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-

tion and any of the doors is opened, the

light will come on. After all the doors are

closed, the light remains on for a certain

time before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes out immediately:

DAll the doors are closed when the igni-

tion key is in “ACC” or “ON” position.

DThe ignition key is turned to “ACC”,

“ON” or “START” after all the doors are

closed.

DAll the doors are locked when the light

is still on.

When all the doors are unlocked using

either the key or the wireless remote con-

trol transmitter simultaneously, the lights

come on for about 15 seconds before fad-

ing out.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

DCancelling the door key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

DChanging the timing for the light turn-

ing off

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at “DOOR” position

for 20 minutes or more.

CENTER PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn on the center personal light,

push the switch. To turn the light off,

push the switch once again.

Standard and access cab models—

For easy access to the ignition switch,

the ignition switch light comes on when

the driver’s door is opened. The step

light also comes on when the driver’s

door is opened.

The ignition switch light remains on for

some time after the driver’s door is

closed.

Double cab models—

For easy access to the ignition switch,

the ignition switch light comes on when

any of the doors are opened. The step

light also comes on when the any of

the doors are opened.

Ignition switch and step lights

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

160

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The lights remain on for some time after

all the doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the lights

go off immediately.

DAll the doors are closed when the igni-

tion key is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion.

DThe ignition key is turned to the “ACC”,

“ON”, or “START” position after all the

doors are closed.

DAll the doors are closed and locked.

When all the doors are unlocked using

either the key or the wireless remote con-

trol transmitter simultaneously, the lights

will come on and remain on for about 15

seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened for 20 minutes or more.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

DCancelling the door key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

DChanging the timing for the light turn-

ing off

The cargo lamp is designed to light up

the rear deck of your vehicle.

CARGO LAMP OPERATION

By pushing the “CARGO LAMP” switch

To turn on: Push the “CARGO LAMP”

switch once.

At this time, the indicator light on the

instrument panel will come on.

To turn off: Push the “CARGO LAMP”

switch once again.

By locking and unlocking the doors (ve-

hicles with the power door lock system)

You can operate the cargo lump by this

method when all the doors are closed and

the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position or the key is removed.

To turn on: Unlock the doors with the key,

the power door lock switch or the wireless

remote control transmitter (double cab

models).

The cargo lamp will automatically turn off

after 20 seconds.

To turn off: Lock the doors with the key,

the power door lock switch or the wireless

remote control transmitter (double cab

models).

Cargo lamp

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

161

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

By opening and closing the doors

To turn on: Open any of the doors.

To turn off: Close all the doors:

DWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the cargo lamp will go off im-

mediately.

DWhen the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position or the key is

removed, the cargo lamp will automati-

cally go off after 20 seconds.

CARGO LAMP AUTOMATIC POWER−OFF

FUNCTION

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the cargo lamp will automatically go off

when the lamp remains on for 30 minutes

or more.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the

wiping time interval when the wiper lever

is in the intermittent position (position 1).

Twist the band upward to increase the

time between sweeps, and downward to

decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you and release it.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will

operate a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” in Section 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

Windshield wipers and washer

(intermittent type)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

162

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Slow

Position 2 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,

push the lever up and release it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you and release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” in Section 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

To defog or defrost the outside rear

view mirrors, push the switch.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The heater panels in the outside rear view

mirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-

faces. An indicator light will illuminate to

indicate the mirror heaters are operating.

Push the switch once again to turn the

mirror heaters off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the mirror heaters have operated about

15 minutes.

Windshield wipers and washer

(mist type)

Outside rear view mirror

heaters

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

163

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,

do not touch them when the switch

is on.

Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off

when the mirror surfaces are clear. Leav-

ing the mirror heaters on for a long time

could cause the battery to discharge, es-

pecially during stop−and−go driving. The

mirror heaters are not designed for drying

rain water or for melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-

ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer

before operating the switch.

To defog or defrost the back window,

push the switch with the back window

closed.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the

back window will quickly clear the surface.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

the defogger is operating.

Heater panels in the outside rear view

mirrors will also quickly clear the sur-

faces.

Push the switch once again to turn the

defogger off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defoggers have operated about 15

minutes.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off

when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the

defoggers on for a long time could cause

the battery to discharge, especially during

stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are

not designed for drying rain water or for

melting snow.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,

do not touch them when the defogger

switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

Back window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

164

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

165

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Oil pressure gauge 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Voltmeter 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

166

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

The gauge indicates the approximate

quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”

Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-

ating or making turns. This is caused by

the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low

fuel level warning light comes on, fill the

fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge

needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill

the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

Without tachometer

With tachometer

Fuel gauge

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

167

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature when the ignition switch is

on. The engine operating temperature

will vary with changes in weather and

engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,

your engine is too hot. If your vehicle

overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the

engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe

operating conditions, such as:

DDriving up a long hill on a hot day.

DReducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.

DIdling for a long period with the air

conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

DTowing a trailer.

NOTICE

zDo not remove the thermostat in

the engine cooling system as this

may cause the engine to overheat.

The thermostat is designed to con-

trol the flow of coolant to keep the

temperature of the engine within

the specified operating range.

zDo not continue driving with an

overheated engine. See “If your ve-

hicle overheats” in Section 4. Idling

Normal driving

The oil pressure gauge indicates engine

oil pressure when the ignition switch is

on. Check it while driving to make sure

that the needle is in the proper range.

If the oil pressure should stay below the

normal range, pull off the road to a safe

place and stop the engine immediately.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop for assistance.

Oil pressure may not build up when the

oil level is too low. The oil pressure

gauge is not designed to indicate oil level,

and the oil level must be checked using

the level dipstick.

Oil pressure gauge

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

168

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the oil

pressure below the normal range until

the cause is fixed—it may ruin the

engine.

The voltmeter tells whether the battery

is charged or discharged. Check it

while the engine is running—the needle

should always indicate as shown above.

If the needle reads below or above the

normal range while the engine is running,

it indicates the charging system needs im-

mediate repair.

However, it is normal for the needle to

drop below the normal range during en-

gine starting.

The tachometer indicates engine speed

in thousands of rpm (revolutions per

minute). Use it while driving to select

correct shift points and to prevent en-

gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fast

causes excessive engine wear and poor

fuel economy. Remember, in most cases

the slower the engine speed, the greater

the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get

into the red zone. This may cause

severe engine damage.

Voltmeter Tachometer

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

169

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two

trip meters to zero, and also change

the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the knob. The meter

display changes in the order from the

odometer to trip meter A to trip meter

B, then back to the odometer each

time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the knob until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

170

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

(indicator and buzzer∗)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

∗: For vehicles with the vehicle stability control system only

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

171

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(i) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(j) Close all doors.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(l) Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light blinks, contact Toyota

dealer.

(m) Stop and check.

(n) Add washer fluid.

(o) Replace engine oil.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

172

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(p) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

(q) Four−wheel drive system

warning buzzer Shift the transfer mode correctly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

173

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and

Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases

when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-

tion.

DWhen the parking brake is applied...

With the vehicle stability control system—

This light comes on for a few seconds

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position even after the parking brake

is released.

DWhen the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving

normally when the brake fluid level is

low.

DWhen the hydraulic brake booster

fails (with the vehicle stability con-

trol system)...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem

resulting in poor braking performance, the

warning light comes on and buzzer sounds

continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your

Toyota dealer in the following cases:

DThe light does not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the igni-

tion key is in the “ON” position.

With the vehicle stability control system—

DThe light does not come on even if the

ignition key is turned on with the park-

ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

Without the vehicle stability control

system—

If the light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is released

while the engine is running, immedi-

ately stop your vehicle at a safe

place and contact your Toyota dealer.

In this case, the brakes may not work

properly and your stopping distance

will become longer. Depress the brake

pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to

an immediate stop.

With the vehicle stability control sys-

tem—

If any of the following conditions oc-

curs, immediately stop your vehicle at

a safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

DThe light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is released

while the engine is running.

DThe warning buzzer comes on to-

gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that

the brakes may not work properly

and your stopping distance will be-

come longer. Depress the brake

pedal firmly and bring the vehicle

to an immediate stop.

DThe brake system warning light re-

mains on together with the “ABS”

warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely un-

stable during braking.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

174

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

With the vehicle stability control sys-

tem—

Any of the following conditions may oc-

cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-

tion:

DThe light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

DDepressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the warning light and

buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off

and the buzzer stops sounding after a

few seconds.

DYou may hear a small sound in the

engine compartment after the engine is

started or the brake pedal is depressed

repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating

sound of the brake system, and it is

not a malfunction.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or

“START”, the reminder light flashes and

buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is

not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the

belt, the light continues flashing and the

buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

minder Light

The light acts as a reminder to have the

front passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Vehicles with bench seat—

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or

“START”, the reminder light flash if a pas-

senger sits in the front passenger seat

and does not fasten the seat belt. Howev-

er, if a front passenger uses an additional

seat cushion, the light may not flash even

when the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight and how it is placed on the seat,

built−in sensors in the seat cushion may

detect the pressure, causing the reminder

light to flash.

Vehicles with separate seat—

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON”,

the reminder light flashes if a passenger

sits in the front passenger seat and does

not fasten the seat belt.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight, the reminder light may come on.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is being

discharged.

If it comes on while you are driving, there

is a problem somewhere in the charging

system.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-

ate, however, until the battery is dis-

charged. Turn off the air conditioning,

blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to

the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the engine

drive belt is broken or loose.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

175

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are

driving, pull off the road to a safe place

and stop the engine immediately. Call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when

the engine is idling or it may come on

briefly after a hard stop. There is no

cause for concern if it then goes out when

the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level

is extremely low. It is not designed to

indicate low oil level, and the oil level

must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the

warning light on—even for one block.

It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition

key is turned to the “ON” position and

goes off after the engine starts. This

means that the warning light system is

operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp

comes on while driving, first check the

followings.

DEmpty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-

ately.

DLoose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely

tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after

several trips, contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel

tank cap is not loose...

DThere is a problem somewhere in the

engine, emission control system, elec-

tronic throttle control system, automatic

transmission electrical system or warn-

ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

176

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state

emission inspection if the malfunction

indicator lamp remains on. Contact your

Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s

emission control system and OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) system before

taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs” in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level

in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up

the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

Vehicles without vehicle stability control

system—

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−

lock brake system works properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds. There-

after, if the system malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

but the brake system still operates con-

ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels could lock up during

a sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

somewhere in the components moni-

tored by the warning light system. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or the light remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

Vehicles with vehicle stability control

system—

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−

lock brake system and the brake assist

system work properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either

of the systems malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

177

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

DAnti−lock brake system

DBrake assist system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DVehicle stability control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

DThe light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

DDepressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

turns off after a few seconds.

(i) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

DVehicle stability control system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

The light will come on when the ignition

key turned to “ON”, and will go off after

a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the lights. It is normal if they

go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the

above mentioned systems do not work.

However, as the brakes operate normally

when applied, it is no problem to continue

your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

178

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When the brake fluid level is too low, the

traction control system, “AUTO LSD” sys-

tem and vehicle stability control system

will not operate and the warning light

comes on.

(j) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doors

are completely closed.

(k) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

After about 6 seconds, the light will go

off. This means the system of the air-

bag and front seat belt pretensioners

are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

passenger airbag manual on−off switch,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator

light, interconnecting wiring and power

sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction somewhere in

the parts monitored by the warning light

system. Contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible to service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure of

one or more of your tires (including the

spare tire) is low. The light comes on

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-

onds. This indicates that the tire pressure

warning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on, stop your

vehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-

sible and check that the inflation pressure

of all tires (including the spare tire) is as

specified on the tire and loading informa-

tion label. (See “Checking tire inflation

pressure” in Section 7−2.) The light should

go off a few minutes after the tire pres-

sure is adjusted.

If the warning light blinks, the tire pres-

sure warning system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warning

system” in Section 1−7.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid

Temperature Warning Light

(four−wheel drive models)

This light warns that the automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-

ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop

the vehicle at a safe place and put the

selector lever in “P”. With the engine id-

ling, wait until the light goes off. If the

light goes off, you may start the vehicle

again. If the light does not go off, call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level

Warning Light

This light warns that the windshield wash-

er fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid

at your earliest opportunity. (For instruc-

tions, see “Adding washer fluid” in Section

7−3.)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

179

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

(o) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder

Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder when to

replace the engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignition

key is turned to “ON” and will go off after

about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500

miles) after the engine oil replacement,

this light illuminates for about 3 seconds

and then flashes for about 12 seconds

with the ignition key turned to the “ON”

position. If you continue driving without

replacing the engine oil, and if the dis-

tance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000

miles), the light will come on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON” position.

The light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that

you replace the engine oil at an early

opportunity depending on the driving and

road conditions. If the light comes on,

replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-

gine oil replacement. Reset the system by

the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position with the odometer

reading shown. (For details, see

“Odometer and two trip meters” in this

Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-

tion while holding down the trip meter

reset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-

onds. The odometer indicates “000000”

and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light will

continue flashing.

(p) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove

the key when you open the driver’s door

with the ignition key in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

(q) Four−wheel Drive System Warning

Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you that the transfer

mode is not selected correctly.

If the buzzer sounds when you shift the

transfer from “2WD” to “4HI”, “4LO” to

“4HI”, “4HI” to “4LO”, or “4LO” to “2WD”

mode, follow the instructions in “Four−

wheel drive system” in Section 1−7.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

180

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER

INDICATORS (except the low fuel level

warning light and low windshield

washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do

not start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light should

come on.

The following service reminder indica-

tors go off after a few seconds:

D“ABS” warning light

D“VSC TRAC” warning light

DLow tire pressure warning light

DEngine oil replacement reminder light

DRoll sensing of curtain shield airbag off

indicator light

D“AUTO LSD” indicator light

D“VSC OFF” indicator light

(four−wheel drive models)

DSlip indicator light

The SRS warning light goes off after

about 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the “ABS”

warning light (brake assist system

warning light), “VSC TRAC” warning

light, slip indicator light and “VSC OFF”

(four−wheel drive models) indicator light

stay on for about 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It is normal if they go out after

a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-

ing buzzer does not function as described

above, have it checked by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

181

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Ignition switch with steering lock 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual transmission 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive system 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction control system 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

“AUTO LSD” system 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle stability control system 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire pressure warning system 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

182

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

“START”—Starter motor on. The key

will return to the “ON” position when

released.

For starting tips, see Section 3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessories

on.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction if the needle on all

meters and gauges move slightly when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio

operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position and open the driver’s

door, a buzzer will remind you to remove

the key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering

wheel is locked. The key can be re-

moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the key

from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. On

vehicles with an automatic transmission,

the selector lever must be in the “P” posi-

tion before pushing the key.

When starting the engine, the key may

seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To

free it, first be sure the key is pushed all

the way in, and then rock the steering

wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engine

is turned off, you may hear sound coming

from underneath the rear deck for several

minutes. This is normal operation and

does not indicate a malfunction. (See

“Leak detection pump”.)

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

Never remove the key when the ve-

hicle is moving, as this will lock the

steering wheel and result in loss of

steering control.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”

position if the engine is not running.

The battery will discharge and the

ignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steering

lock

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

183

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” or “ACC” position and the

selector lever pulled toward you).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is displayed on the in-

strument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key

removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

3,2: Stronger engine braking

(b) Shift position “L” switch

(“SHIFT L” switch)

To down shift to first gear (“L” position),

push this switch with the shift lever in the

“2” position. The “ L” is displayed on the

instrument cluster and engine braking will

be maximized.

To shift up to the “2” position, push this

switch again.

To shift up to a position other than “2”,

move the selector lever to that position.

Automatic transmission

Selector lever

Overdrive switch

With the brake pedal

depressed, shift while pulling

the selector lever toward you.

(The ignition switch must be

in “ON” or “ACC” position.)

Shift while pulling the selector

lever toward you.

Shift normally.

Push the shift position “L” switch.

To shift from the “L” position to a

position other than “2”, move the

selector lever to that position.

Shift position

“L” switch

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

184

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

You can select either fourth gear (with

overdrive off) or fifth gear (with overdrive

on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.

The “O/D OFF” indicator light should come

on. To turn the overdrive on again, push

the switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicator

light should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-

drive on for better fuel economy and

quieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-

drive is off and restarted, the overdrive

will automatically be on.

Vehicles with cruise control—When the

cruise control is being used, even if you

downshift the transmission by pushing and

releasing the overdrive switch, engine

braking will not be enabled because the

cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” in this Section.

(d) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” in Section 3. The

transmission must be in “P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for better

fuel economy and quieter driving. If the

engine coolant temperature is low, the

transmission will not shift into the over-

drive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

(e) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DPush the overdrive switch. The “O/D

OFF” indicator light will come on and

the transmission will downshift to third

gear.

DShift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

127 km/h (79 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

“4HI” mode is selected

127 km/h (79 mph)

“4LO” mode is selected

49 km/h (30 mph)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

185

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DShift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

84 km/h (52 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

“4HI” mode is selected

84 km/h (52 mph)

“4LO” mode is selected

32 km/h (20 mph)

DPush the “SHIFT L” switch. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

1GR−FE engine 40 km/h (25 mph)

2UZ−FE engine

“2WD” or “4HI” mode is selected

36 km/h (22 mph)

“4LO” mode is selected

14 km/h (8 mph)

Vehicles with cruise control—When the

cruise control is being used, even if you

downshift the transmission by pushing and

releasing the overdrive switch, engine

braking will not be enabled because the

cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” in this Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

(f) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for

strong engine braking as described pre-

viously.

With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or

“SHIFT L” switch depressed, the vehicle

can move just as if the lever was in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3”, “2”, the

vehicle will start in first gear and automat-

ically shift to second gear.

With the “SHIFT L” switch depressed, the

transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

zBe careful not to over−rev the en-

gine. Watch the tachometer to keep

engine rpm from going into the red

zone. The approximate maximum al-

lowable speed for each position is

given below for your reference:

Two−wheel drive models

1GR−FE engine—

“3” 140 km/h (87 mph). . . . . . . . .

“2” 95 km/h (59 mph). . . . . . . . . .

“L” 55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . .

2UZ−FE engine—

Access cab models

“3” 140 km/h (87 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 95 km/h (59 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . .

Double cab models

“3” 135 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 90 km/h (56 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . .

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

186

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Four−wheel drive models

“2WD” or “4HI” mode is selected

Standard and access cab mod-

els

“3” 140 km/h (87 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 95 km/h (59 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . .

Double cab models

“3” 135 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 90 km/h (56 mph). . . . . . . .

“L” 50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . .

“4LO” mode is selected

“3” 55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . .

“2” 35 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . . .

“L” 20 km/h (12 mph). . . . . . . . . .

zDo not continue hill climbing or

hard towing for a long time in the

“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may

cause severe automatic transmis-

sion damage from overheating. To

prevent such damage, “D” position

should be used in hill climbing or

hard towing.

(g) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(h) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

(i) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and ov-

erdrive when climbing a gentle slope,

the overdrive should be turned off. Be

sure to turn the switch on immediately

afterward.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

187

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The shift pattern is as shown above.

In case of driving your vehicle, the buzzer

will sound when you shift the gear into

“R” (reverse).

Press the clutch pedal down fully while

shifting, and then release it slowly. Do not

rest your foot on the pedal while driving,

because it will cause clutch trouble. Do

not use the clutch to hold the vehicle

when stopped on an uphill grade—use the

parking brake.

Recommended shifting speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized and

upshifting or downshifting is easy.

For the best compromise between fuel

economy and vehicle performance, you

should upshift or downshift at the following

speeds:

gear km/h (mph)

1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)

2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)

3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)

4 to 5 or 5 to 4 72 (45)

5 to 6 or 6 to 5 80 (50)

Downshift to the appropriate gear if accel-

eration is needed when you are cruising

below the above downshifting speeds.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting too

late will cause lugging, and possibly ping-

ing. Regularly revving the engine to maxi-

mum speed in each gear will cause ex-

cessive engine wear and high fuel

consumption.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slower

traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-

essary. Make sure you observe the follow-

ing maximum allowable speeds in each

gear:

gear km/h (mph)

1 45 (28)

2 90 (56)

3 130 (81)

4 165 (112)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are going

faster than the maximum allowable

speed for the next lower gear.

Manual transmission

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

188

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Good driving practice

DIf it is difficult to shift into reverse, put

the transmission in neutral, release the

clutch pedal momentarily, and then try

again.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use sixth gear.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

NOTICE

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before shifting into reverse.

Use the “2WD/4HI” and “4LO” switches

to select the following transfer modes.

1. “2WD” (high speed position, two−

wheel drive): “2WD/4HI” and “4LO”

switches left out

Use this for normal driving on dry,

hard−surfaced roads. This position

gives greater economy, the quietest

ride and least wear.

2. “4HI” (high speed position, four−

wheel drive): “2WD/4HI” switch pushed

The “4HI” (high speed four−wheel

drive) indicator light comes on when

the “4HI” mode is selected.

Use this for normal driving on wet, icy

or snow−covered roads. This position

provides greater traction than two−

wheel drive.

In this mode, the vehicle stability con-

trol system is off. (See “Vehicle stabil-

ity control system” in this Section.)

Four−wheel drive system—

(a) Front drive control

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

189

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. “4LO” (low speed position, four−

wheel drive): With the “2WD/4HI”

switch pressed in, push the “4LO”

switch

The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the

“4LO” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and trac-

tion. Use “4LO” mode for climbing or

descending steep hills, off−road driving,

and hard pulling in sand, mud or deep

snow.

In this mode, the vehicle stability con-

trol system is off. (See “Vehicle stabil-

ity control system” in this Section.)

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further

instructions.

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen-

gaged by the shifting operations de-

scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four−wheel drive for

at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.

This will assure that the front drive com-

ponents are lubricated.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4HI”

To shift from “2WD” to “4HI”, reduce

the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h

(62 mph) and push in the “2WD/4HI”

switch.

If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes when you push in

the “2WD/4HI” switch, this reminds you

that the transfer mode is not securely in

“4HI” mode. Drive straight ahead while

accelerating or decelerating.

If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes and the buzzer

sounds when you push in the “2WD/4HI”

switch, this reminds you that the transfer

mode is not in “4HI” mode. Reduce the

vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62

mph). Push the switch to turn it off, then

once again to turn it back on.

CAUTION

Never push the “2WD/4HI” switch if

the wheels are slipping. Stop the slip-

ping or spinning before shifting.

(b) A.D.D.

(automatic disconnecting

differential) (c) Shifting procedure

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

190

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To shift from “4HI” to “2WD”, push the

“2WD/4HI” switch again to turn it off.

This can be done at any speed.

If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes when you push the

“2WD/4HI” switch again to return to “2WD”

mode, this reminds you that the transfer

mode is not securely in “2WD” mode.

Drive straight ahead while accelerating or

decelerating, or drive forward or backward

in a short distance.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “4HI” AND “4LO”

To shift from “4HI” to “4LO”, stop the

vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.

With the brake pedal depressed, push the

“4LO” switch. If the “2WD/4HI” switch left

out, push in the “2WD/4HI” switch to se-

lect the “4HI” mode.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes and the buzzer

sounds for three times when you push the

“4LO” switch, this reminds you that the

transfer mode is not in “4LO” mode. Drive

forward or backward in a short distance,

then stop the vehicle completely, put the

transmission securely into “N” and push

the switch again.

To shift from “4LO” to “4HI”, stop the

vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.

With the brake pedal depressed, push the

“4LO” switch.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes and the buzzer

sounds for three times when you push the

“4LO” switch, this reminds you that the

transfer mode is not in “4HI” mode. Drive

forward or backward in a short distance,

then stop the vehicle completely, put the

transmission securely into “N” and push

the switch again.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4LO”

To shift from “2WD” to “4LO”, stop the

vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.

With the brake pedal depressed, push the

“2WD/4HI” switch in to select the “4HI”

mode, then push the “4LO” switch.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes and the buzzer

sounds for three times when you push the

“4LO” switch, this reminds you that the

transfer mode is not in “4LO” mode. Drive

forward or backward in a short distance,

then stop the vehicle completely, put the

transmission securely into “N” and push

the switch again.

To shift from “4LO” to “2WD”, stop the

vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.

With the brake pedal depressed, push the

“2WD/4HI” switch again to turn it off.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

191

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes and the buzzer

sounds when you push the “2WD/4HI”

switch, this reminds you that the transfer

mode is not in “2WD” mode. Push the

“2WD/4HI” switch in to return to “4LO”

mode, drive forward or backward in a

short distance, then stop the vehicle com-

pletely, put the transmission securely into

“N” and push the “2WD/4HI” switch once

again.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light flashes when you push the

“2WD/4HI” switch, this reminds you that

the transfer mode is not in “2WD” mode.

Drive straight ahead while accelerating or

decelerating, or drive forward or backward

in a short distance.

The traction control system automatical-

ly helps prevent the spinning of rear

wheels (two−wheel drive models) or 4

wheels (four−wheel drive models) when

the vehicle is started or accelerated on

slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,

the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the rear wheels (two−wheel

drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel

drive models) cannot be maintained,

even though the traction control sys-

tem is in operation. Do not drive the

vehicle under any speed or maneuver-

ing conditions which may cause the

vehicle to lose traction control. In si-

tuations where the road surface is

covered with ice or snow, your ve-

hicle should be fitted with snow tires

or tire chains. Always drive at an ap-

propriate and cautious speed for the

present road conditions.

Without tachometer

With tachometer

Traction control system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

192

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Leave the system on during the ordi-

nary driving so that it can operate

when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the trac-

tion control system is in the self−check

mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-

ating, the following conditions occur:

DThe system controls the spinning of the

rear wheels (two−wheel drive models)

or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models).

At this time, the slip indicator light

blinks.

DYou may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the

brakes. This indicates the system is

functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during the traction control system, vehicle

stability control system or “AUTO LSD”

system operating. If the brake actuator

temperature becomes too high while any

of the systems is operating, a buzzer will

start to sound intermittently to indicate

that the traction control system can no

longer operate. In this case, immediately

stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the slip indicator light will

come on and the traction control system

temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

traction control system does not operate,

it is no problem to continue driving.) The

system will be automatically restored after

a short time and the slip indicator light

goes off.

Without tachometer

With tachometer

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

193

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

DTraction control system

DVehicle stability control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the light will

come on and will go off after a few sec-

onds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip

indicator light comes on while driving, the

traction control system does not work.

However, as the brakes operate normally

when applied, it is no problem to continue

your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction

by using the traction control system to

control engine performance and braking

when one of the rear wheels begins to

spin.

This system is used only when wheel

spinning occurs in a ditch or rough

surface.

This system is effective in case one of

the rear wheels is spinning.

“AUTO LSD” system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

194

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system

in conditions other than the above. A

much greater steering effort and more

careful cornering control will be re-

quired.

To activate the system, push the “AUTO

LSD” switch with the vehicle stopped.

The “AUTO LSD” is activated under the

following condition. At this time, the

“AUTO LSD” indicator light will come

on.

DThe driving mode is set in the two−

wheel drive mode (in the four−wheel

drive mode, the system does not

work.)

DDriving at a speed under 100 km/h (62

mph)

To cancel the system, push the “AUTO

LSD” switch once again.

If the engine is turned off while the

“AUTO LSD” indicator light is on and then

restarted, the indicator light will turn off

automatically.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

195

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

Make sure the “AUTO LSD” indicator light

comes on under the above condition when

you use the “AUTO LSD” system.

The slip indicator light blinks when the

system is controlling the spinning of the

rear wheels.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights

come on for a few seconds when the

ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indi-

cator lights does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to “ON”, contact

your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during the traction control system, vehicle

stability control system or “AUTO LSD”

system operating. If the brake actuator

temperature becomes too high while any

of the systems is operating, a buzzer will

start to sound intermittently to indicate

that the “AUTO LSD” system can no lon-

ger operate. In this case, immediately stop

your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light will

come on and the “AUTO LSD” system

temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it

is no problem to continue driving.) The

system will be automatically restored after

a short time and the slip indicator light

goes off.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

196

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

D“AUTO LSD” system

DTraction control system

DVehicle stability control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the light will

come on and will go off after a few sec-

onds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip

indicator light comes on while driving, the

“AUTO LSD” system does not work. How-

ever, as the brakes operate normally when

applied, it is no problem to continue your

driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

NOTICE

Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”

switch continuously turned on.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

197

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

systems such as anti−lock brake sys-

tem, traction control, engine control,

etc. This system automatically controls

the output of the brakes or engine to

help prevent the vehicle from skidding

when cornering on a slippery road sur-

face or operating steering wheel abrupt-

ly.

The vehicle stability control activates

when the vehicle speed is more than 15

km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self−check mode, but does

not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

DDo not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-

ing will result in an unexpected ac-

cident. If the slip indicator light

blinks and an alarm sounds, special

care should be taken while driving.

DOnly use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread

pattern for all 4 tires should be the

same. If you use the tires other

than specified, or different type or

size, the vehicle stability control

system may not function correctly.

When replacing the tires or wheels,

contact your Toyota dealer. (See

“Checking and replacing tires” in

Section 7−2.)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

Vehicle stability control

system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

198

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

If the brake pedal is depressed while the

vehicle stability control system is active,

the brake pedal will become hard at an

earlier position than usual. However, the

brakes will respond to the pedal force if

depressed further.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

Four−wheel drive models only—

Shifting the driving mode into the four−

wheel drive mode automatically turns

the vehicle stability control system off.

At this time, the “VSC OFF” indicator

comes on.

“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for a

few seconds when the ignition key is

turned to “ON”. It will come on again

when you shift the driving mode into the

four−wheel drive mode.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe indicator light does not come on

when the ignition key is turned to

“ON”.

DThe indicator light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe indicator light comes on when the

system is on while driving.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

199

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that when there is a

problem somewhere in the following.

DVehicle stability control system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

The light will come on when the ignition

key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after

about a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 seconds

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It

is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if they

go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the

vehicle stability control system does not

work. However, as the brakes operate nor-

mally when applied, it is no problem to

continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The “VSC OFF” indicator light will come

on when the “VSC TRAC” warning light

comes on even if the “2WD/4HI” or “4LO”

switch is not pushed.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

200

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The tire pressure warning system is de-

signed to provide warning when tire

inflation pressure of one or more of

your tires (including the spare tire) is

low. The low tire pressure warning light

comes on to inform you that low tire

inflation pressure may hamper driving.

Without tachometer

With tachometer

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT

This light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off

after a few seconds. This indicates that

the tire pressure warning system is func-

tioning properly.

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on or blinks, do the following.

If the warning light comes on:

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible and check that the

inflation pressure of all tires (including

the spare tire) is as specified on the

tire and loading information label. (See

“Checking tire inflation pressure” in

Section 7−2.) If the warning light comes

on even after tire inflation pressure ad-

justment, you may have a flat tire. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with the

spare tire. For details, see “If you have

a flat tire” in Section 4.

The warning light goes off a few minutes

after air is put into the deflated tire.

This warning light may turn on due to

natural causes such as natural air leaks

or tire pressure changes caused by tem-

perature. In this case, adjusting the tire

pressure will turn off the warning light.

Tire pressure warning

system—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

201

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

When the tire pressure warning light

comes on, observe the following in-

structions:

DDepending on the conditions, re-

duce to an appropriate speed as

soon as possible.

DAdjust the tire pressure to the spe-

cified level as soon as possible.

DAvoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-

vering and braking. Tire deteriora-

tion may reduce steering wheel con-

trol and brake effectiveness. This

may lead to serious injury or death.

DThe tire pressure warning system

may not activate immediately if sud-

den bursts of air leakage occur.

NOTICE

zDo not use liquid sealants for a flat

tire as air pressure sensors will be

damaged.

zWhen the tires must be repaired or

replaced, have them repaired or re-

placed by the nearest Toyota dealer

or authorized tire dealer. The tire

pressure sensors will be affected by

the installation or removal of tires.

zThe tire pressure warning system is

not to be used as a substitute for

regular inspections. Be sure to

check the air pressure in the tires

on a regular basis.

zWhen the tires must be replaced,

replace the grommets for air pres-

sure sensors as well.

If the warning light blinks:

The tire pressure warning system may

be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota

dealer.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

The tire pressure warning system does

not function properly under certain cir-

cumstances. In the following cases, the

low tire pressure warning light may not

come on even if the tire inflation pres-

sure is low, or it may come on when

the tire inflation pressure is actually

normal.

DElectric devices or facilities using simi-

lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

DA radio set to similar frequencies is in

use.

DA lot of snow or ice covers the ve-

hicle, in particular, around the wheels

or wheel housings.

DThe tires are not equipped with an air

pressure sensor.

DSnow tires or tire chains are used.

DNon−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

DThe sensor battery is expired.

DRadio waves from the air pressure sen-

sor installed on the spare tire cannot

be received.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

202

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DThe use of non−genuine wheels will

cause the air pressure sensors to

transmit the electronic code in dif-

ferent manner, resulting in the sys-

tem failure.

DThe use of different type of tires

with genuine wheels may also

cause the malfunction of the sys-

tem.

CAUTION

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly un-

der−inflated. You should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible,

and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire

information placard. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under−inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under−inflation also re-

duces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-

dling and stopping ability. Each tire,

including the spare, should be

checked monthly when cold and set

to the recommended inflation pres-

sure as specified in the vehicle plac-

ard and owner’s manual.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

203

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

DReorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

DIncrease the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

DConnect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

DConsult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

204

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When replacing the wheels, be sure to

install air pressure sensors on the

wheels.

There are 3 ways to set up the air pres-

sure sensors:

a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel

and install it to the new wheel.

b. Keep the same wheel with air pressure

sensor and replace only the tire.

c. Use a new wheel and sensor. In this

case, you have to register an ID code

for a new sensor.

CAUTION

Have the tires, wheels or sensors re-

placed and ID codes registered by a

Toyota dealer. If you need sensors,

purchase from a Toyota dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM

RESET SWITCH

The tire pressure warning system need

to be initialized in the following condi-

tions:

DAfter replacing or rotating tires or

wheels

DAfter replacing an air pressure sen-

sor.

When initializing the system, the pres-

ent tire condition is stored as a stan-

dard.

To initialize the system, perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and

apply the parking brake. Stop the en-

gine.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed

tires to the specified level. (See “Tires”

in Section 8.)

3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

4. Push and hold the reset switch until

the low tire pressure warning light

blinks three times.

Initialization is completed over for more

than 20 minute.

—Replacing tires and wheels

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

205

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

When initializing the system, make sure

the low tire pressure warning light blinks

three times. If the warning light does not

blink three times, initialization failed and

the tire pressure warning system will not

function properly. In this case, initialize

the system again.

Do not push the reset switch without ad-

justing the tire inflation pressure to the

specified level. Otherwise, the low tire

pressure warning light may not come on

even if the tire pressure is low, or it may

come on when the tire inflation pressure

is actually normal.

If you push the reset switch while the

vehicle is moving, initialization is not per-

formed.

If the low tire pressure warning light does

not blink when you push and hold the

reset switch, have the low pressure warn-

ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.

Pedal type

Lever type

Parking brake

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

206

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When parking, firmly apply the parking

brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

Pedal type—

To set: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal. For better holding power, first de-

press the brake pedal and hold it while

setting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brake

pedal once again.

Lever type—

To set: Pull out on the lever. For better

holding power, first depress the brake

pedal and hold it while setting the parking

brake.

To release: Press the lock release button

(1), turn the lever (2), then push it in (3).

To remind you that the parking brake is

set, the parking brake reminder light in

the instrument panel remains on until you

release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is fully released and the park-

ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruise

the vehicle at a desired speed over 40

km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained up

or down grades within the limits of engine

performance, although a slight speed

change may occur when driving up or

down the grades. On steeper hills, a

greater speed change will occur so it is

better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

DTo help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the

cruise control when driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-

pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or

winding roads.

DAvoid vehicle speed increases when

driving downhill. If the vehicle

speed is too fast in relation to the

cruise control set speed, cancel the

cruise control then downshift the

transmission to use engine braking

to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the

“ON−OFF” button. This turns the system

on. The indicator light in the instrument

panel shows that you can now set the

vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-

er press will turn the system completely

off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-

gagement, keep the “ON−OFF” button

off when not using the cruise control.

Cruise control

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

207

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” before

you set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-

tion and release it. This sets the vehicle

at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-

tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,

or tap it down for a slower speed. Each

tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h

(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator

pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed

the set speed. When you release it, the

vehicle will return to the speed set prior

to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”

direction and releasing it

b. Depressing the brake pedal

c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40

km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-

matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10

mph) below the preset speed, the preset

speed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancels

out other than for the above cases, have

your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-

er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction

and hold it. Release the lever when the

desired speed is attained. While the lever

is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain

speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-

celerate the vehicle and then push the

lever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-

tion and hold it. Release the lever when

the desired speed is attained. While the

lever is held down, the vehicle speed will

gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-

press the brake pedal and then push the

lever down in the “− SET” direction.

Even if you turn off the overdrive switch

with the cruise control on, engine braking

will not be applied because the cruise

control is not cancelled. To decrease the

vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed

with the cruise control lever or depress

the brake pedal. If you use the brake

pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

208

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling

the control lever or by depressing the

brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the

“+ RES” direction will restore the speed

set prior to cancellation.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the

instrument cluster flashes when using the

cruise control, press the “ON−OFF” button

to turn the system off and then press it

again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-

curs, there is some trouble in the cruise

control system.

DThe indicator light does not come on.

DThe indicator light flashes again.

DThe indicator light goes out after it

comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota

dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

209

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Audio system

Reference 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio system 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio remote controls 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat audio system 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat entertainment system 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio/video system operating hints 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 8

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

210

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-

pact disc player (with compact disc

changer controller)

Type 3: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-

pact disc player with changer

Reference

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

211

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This section describes some of the basic

features on Toyota audio systems. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio system works when the ignition

key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “TAPE”,

“DISC” or “LOAD” to turn on that function

without pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on

the cassette or compact disc player, a

cassette or compact disc must be loaded

in the player.

You can turn on each player by inserting

a cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejecting

the cassette tape or compact disc. If the

audio system was previously off, then the

entire audio system will be turned off

when you eject the cassette tape or com-

pact disc. If another function was pre-

viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “TAPE”,

“DISC” or “LOAD” if the system is already

on but you want to switch from one func-

tion to another.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone and

balance controls, see the description of

your own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to

you is largely determined by the mix of

the treble, midrange, and bass levels. In

fact, different kinds of music and vocal

programs usually sound better with differ-

ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to

a stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the vol-

ume of one group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove an antenna, carefully turn it

counterclockwise.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposed

tape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player and

do not insert anything other than cas-

sette tapes into the slot, or the tape

player may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

(type 1 and type 2)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in

with the label side up. (The player will

automatically eject a disc if the label side

is down.) The player will play from track

1 through the end of the disc. Then it will

play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

Using your audio system—

—Some basics

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

212

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Type 1—

Your compact disc player does not need

an adaptor to play compact disc singles.

Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3

in.) in diameter−smaller than standard

discs.

After you eject a compact disc single, do

not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc

until “DISC” disappears from the display.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compact

disc singles—it could cause tracking

errors or interfere with the ejection of

compact discs.

Type 2—

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH

CHANGER (type 3)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”

button and gently push the disc in with

the label side up. (The player will auto-

matically eject a disc if the label side is

down.) This compact disc player can store

up to six discs. The player will play from

track 1 through the end of the disc. Then

it will play from track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

zDo not stack up two discs for in-

sertion, or it will cause damage to

the compact disc changer. Insert

only one compact disc into slot at

a time.

zNever try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

213

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

—Controls and features

"Type 1

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

214

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The button num-

ber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The button num-

ber and station frequency will appear on

the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button to

eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To

adjust the tone and balance, turn the

knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compact

disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

The “DISC” button may also be used to

operate a DVD player when a disc is

loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the

“DISC” button changes between the CD

player and DVD player. When the DVD

player is in operation, “AUX” appears on

the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the following error

messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

215

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

RPT (Repeat)

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

216

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track of the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the player has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the DVD player is in operation, the

chapter or track can be changed by push-

ing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

217

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step

up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-

clockwise to step down the frequency.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

218

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

"Type 2

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

219

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The button num-

ber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The button num-

ber and station frequency will appear on

the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button to

eject a cassette. Push the compact disc

eject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to select

the other side of a cassette tape. The

display indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”

indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-

ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)

to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on

the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”

or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto−reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To

adjust the tone and balance, turn the

knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID (access cab models): Adjusts mid−

pitched tones. The display ranges from −5

to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

220

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compact

disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

The “DISC” button may also be used to

operate a DVD player when a disc is

loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the

“DISC” button changes between the CD

player and DVD player. When the DVD

player is in operation, “AUX” appears on

the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the six following

error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

DolbyrB NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was

recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,

push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will

appear on the display. Push the button

again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise

by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-

tion, play your tapes with this button on

or off according to the mode used to re-

cord the tape.

∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the

double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio

and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”

will appear on the display. This system

allows you to set twelve FM stations, two

for each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

221

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. “ ” will appear on

the display. When the track ends, it will

automatically rewind and replay. To turn

off the repeat feature, push this button

again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between tracks in order for the re-

peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

222

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track of the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the player has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to

locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is

considered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,

the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken word, live, or classical

recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the DVD player is in operation, the

chapter or track can be changed by push-

ing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette

tape.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

223

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TEXT

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step

up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-

clockwise to step down the frequency.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

224

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

"Type 3

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

225

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttons

when you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS”

button.)

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM and

RDS stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM

TYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” but-

ton.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset

button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to select

the other side of a cassette tape. The

display indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”

indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-

ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)

to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on

the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”

or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto−reverse feature.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

226

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To

adjust the tone and balance, turn the

knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compact

disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

The “DISC” button may also be used to

operate a DVD player when a disc is

loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the

“DISC” button changes between the CD

player and DVD player. When the DVD

player is in operation, “AUX” appears on

the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the six following

error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

227

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DolbyrB NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was

recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,

push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will

appear on the display. Push the button

again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise

by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-

tion, play your tapes with this button on

or off according to the mode used to re-

cord the tape.

∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the

double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio

and select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or

“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.

This system allows you to set twelve FM

and six RDS stations, three for each of

the preset button. If the RDS is off or

RDS stations are not preset to the preset

buttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on the

display.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button, then insert

a compact disc. After the disc is loaded,

the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on), then insert

the first compact disc. After the disc is

loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-

matically open again so the next disc can

be inserted. The same process can be

applied for loading the rest of the discs.

If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”

will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

228

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with Radio

Data System (RDS). RDS station providing

good reception is automatically selected if

current reception worsens.

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on and

off. This button is operational except in

AM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold this

button until you hear a beep and “RDS”

will appear on the display. At this time,

the radio starts to search the RDS sta-

tions and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on the

display.

Quickly push and release this button when

the RDS turns on, the radio starts to

search the RDS stations and “RDS

SEARCH” will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found,

“FOUND” and the number of the RDS sta-

tions will appear on the display, and you

will hear two beeps. The stations will be

preset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, “NO

RDS ST” will appear on the display and

you will hear a beep, and the display

returns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button until

you hear a beep again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. “ ” will appear on

the display. When the track ends, it will

automatically rewind and replay. To turn

off the repeat feature, push this button

again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between tracks in order for the re-

peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the top track of

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

229

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track of the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the auto changer

has scanned all the discs, it will stop

scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to

locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is

considered to be a start of a recording.

When beginning of a tape is reached, the

player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken word, live, or classical

recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the DVD player is in operation, the

chapter or track can be changed by push-

ing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette

tape.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

230

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDS

mode.

When an RDS radio station transmits a

text message, “TEXT” will be displayed. At

this time, push the “TEXT” button to view

the text message. The message display

will be canceled if any button that affects

the display is pushed. To view the mes-

sage again, push this button again. After

the entire message has been displayed,

the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory to

store three 64−character messages. To

store a message in memory, push and

hold the “TEXT” button until you hear a

beep.

If three messages are already stored in

memory, the oldest message will be over-

written by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the

“TEXT” button momentarily. This will dis-

play the most recent message. Each push

of the button will display messages in the

order of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or if

there are no more messages to be re-

called, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on the

display, and the message display will be

canceled.

The message display will be canceled if

you activate any function that affects the

display.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement

(TA) feature on and off. This button is

operational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF

SEEK” will flash on the display and the

radio will start seeking any traffic program

station.

When a traffic program station is found,

“TRAF” will be displayed and you will hear

a beep.

After the traffic announcement program is

over, the display returns to the previous

mode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NO

TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a

few seconds and the display returns to

the previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, push

this button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step

up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-

clockwise to step down the frequency.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

231

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the “TYPE” button while

receiving an RDS station, the current pro-

gram type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the pro-

gram type changes as in the following:

DROCK

DEASY LIS (Easy listening)

DCLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

DR&B (Rhythm and Blues)

DINFORM (Information)

DRELIGION

DMISC (Miscellaneous)

DALERT (Emergency message)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

232

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Some parts of the audio system can be

adjusted using the switches on the steer-

ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,

and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “ƜƝ” switch

3. “MODE” switch

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

233

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Volume control switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-

ume continues to increase while the

switch is being pushed.

Push “−” to decrease the volume. The

volume continues to decrease while the

switch is being pushed.

2. “ƜƝ” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch. Do this again to select

the next preset station.

To seek a station:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this

again to find the next station. If you push

the switch on either side during the seek

mode, seeking will be cancelled.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip to a different track in either direc-

tion:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will

appear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switch

until the track you want to listen to is set.

If you push the switch ten times, the skip

function will turn off. (You can skip up to

nine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracks

you want to rewind, remember to count

the current track as well. For example, if

you want to rewind to a song that is two

tracks before the song you are listening

to, push the “Ɲ” side of the switch three

times.

If you push the track switch further than

you wanted to, push the other side of the

switch. The track number will be in-

creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not valid

if it is higher than the number of the

tracks remaining on the current side of

the cassette.

DWhen the tape reaches to the begin-

ning, the player will automatically start

playing that side.

DAfter the tape reaches to the end, the

player will automatically reverse and

start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between tracks for the track switch

to work correctly. In addition, the feature

may not work well with some spoken, live,

or classical recordings.

To f a s t −forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” side of the switch

to fast−forward a cassette tape. “FF” will

appear on the display. Push and hold the

“Ɲ” side of the switch to rewind a tape.

“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push the “Ɯ” side of the switch. To

stop the tape while it is rewinding, push

the “Ɲ” side of the switch.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto−reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a

different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch until the track you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current track, push

the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

234

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

With compact disc changer only—

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until the disc you want to listen to

is set.

3. “MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audio

mode. Each push changes the mode se-

quentially if the desired mode is ready to

use. The DVD player will be selectable if

a rear seat entertainment system is

installed in your vehicle.

To turn the audio system on, push the

“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and

hold the “MODE” switch until the system

turns off.

The rear seat audio system is designed

for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the

audio sound separately between the front

seats and the rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turned

on with the rear audio system controller

even if the front audio system is off.

When the front audio is turned off, the

rear audio system will be turned off simul-

taneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all the

modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape

player and compact disc player with

changer) with the rear seat audio system

when a cassette tape and a compact disc

are loaded in the front audio system.

When the same mode is selected on the

front and rear audio systems at the same

time, the system can be operated on the

front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the front

and rear audio systems at the same time,

AM and FM modes cannot be changed on

the rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment

system with commercial headphone. See

“—Headphone input jacks” in this Section

for details.

You can purchase a wireless headphone

at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not operate a vehicle while using

the headphones. Doing so may cause

an accident, resulting in injury.

Rear seat audio system—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

235

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear seat audio system consists of

following components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat audio system display

3. Rear seat audio system controller

4. Headphone volume control dials

5. Headphone input jacks

6. Controller holder

The rear seat audio system can be oper-

ated with the rear seat audio system con-

troller.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the

controller. It may cause an accident,

fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct

sunlight, high heat and high humidity.

These conditions could cause the

case to deform or the battery to ex-

plode or leak.

—Rear seat audio system

controller

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

236

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER

(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-

ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-

vents the battery from being dis-

charged. Before using the controller,

remove the insulating sheet.

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con-

troller, direct the signal output portion

of the controller to the signal reception

portion of the rear seat audio system

display.

The rear seat audio system controller can

be operated when the ignition switch is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The controller does not operate properly

when the signal reception portion of the

display is exposed to direct sunlight.

Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, and

features of the controller, see

“CONTROLLER FEATURES” in this

Section.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the

controller may be damaged.

zDo not drop or strongly knock the

controller against hard objects.

zDo not sit on or place heavy ob-

jects on the controller.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

237

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in the

holder when it is not in use. The holder

can be hooked on the back of the driv-

er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, stow the controller in

the holder when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposed

to high temperatures (such as on the

instrument panel) for a long time,

otherwise the controller may be dam-

aged.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

238

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

4. “OFF” button

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-

tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations for

the band of the front audio system. (For

instructions, see “—Controls and features”

in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button. The radio will tune in the next

preset station up or down the band. The

station frequency will appear on the dis-

play.

Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button to select the other side of a cas-

sette tape. The display indicates which

side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates

the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom

side.)

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Compact disc player with changer

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”

(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you

push the button, the radio will step up or

down to another frequency. If you push

and hold the button, and the radio will go

into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or

down for a station of the nearest frequen-

cy and will stop on reception. Each time

you push the button, the stations will be

searched one after another.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

239

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Cassette tape player

This button has the following features—

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)

button until “FF” will appears on the dis-

play to forward a tape. Push and hold the

“” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”

appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

To stop the tape while it is rewinding,

push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto−reverse feature.

To skip up or down to locate a song or

recording:

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the

display.

Next, push either side of the track button

until the number on the display reaches

the number of tracks you want to skip. If

you push the button 10 times, the skip

feature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly a

blank space of at least 3 seconds is con-

sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,

the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken, live, or classical re-

cordings.

Compact disc player

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to a different track:

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton until the number of the track you want

to listen to appears on the display. If you

want to return to the beginning of the

current track, quickly push the “ ”

(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse

within a compact disc. When you release

the button, the compact disc player will

resume playing.

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

Push “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on the

rear seat audio system.

Use “ON/SOURCE” button to select an

audio mode when the rear seat audio sys-

tem is on. Each time you push this but-

ton, the system changes between the ra-

dio, cassette player and compact disc

player.

When you change the mode, the display

indicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and compact discs

are not loaded in the front audio system,

only a radio mode can be selected in the

rear seat audio system.

If you push “ON/SOURCE” button to se-

lect the casette tape player mode or com-

pact disc player mode in that case, a

beep sounds from front audio system and

“INVALID” flashes on the screen for 6

seconds, and then the rear audio system

returns to the radio mode.

If you push “ON/SOURCE” button while

receiving an emergency broadcast, a beep

sounds and “INVALID” appears on the

screen to indicate that no button can be

operated.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

240

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, “AM” will

appear on the screen.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or

“FM2” will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a traffic

announcement (TA) while the rear seat

audio system is in the radio mode,

“TRAF” will flash on the screen and the

rear seat audio system will turn off. When

the front audio receives a traffic an-

nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys-

tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while this

mode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while this

mode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track and

disc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will screen one of the four following

error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged

or inserted incorrectly (up−side down).

Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside the

system. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

“ERR 4”: Over−current. Ask your Toyota

dealer to inspect.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

4. “OFF” button

Push “OFF” button to turn off the rear

seat audio system.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that

small children do not swallow the re-

moved battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by a Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local regulations.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

241

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Replace the battery by using the following

procedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing the

lock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put in a new battery with the positive

(+) side up.

Put in the case securely.

NOTICE

zMake sure that the positive side of

the controller battery is facing cor-

rectly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the controller, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

of the controller battery insertion

and that dust or oil does not ad-

here to the transmitter case.

zClose the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

controller operates properly. If the control-

ler still does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

242

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

You can enjoy the rear seat audio sys-

tem with commercial headphone.

To use the headphones, connect them to

the jack.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,

turn the knob. Turn right to increase the

volume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on the

type of headphones.

With some headphone generally available

in the market, it may be difficult to catch

sound properly. Toyota recommends the

use of Toyota genuine headphone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connect

the headphones to the jack. Loud

sounds may have a significant impact

on the human body.

—Headphone input jacks

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

243

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear seat entertainment system con-

sists of the following components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat entertainment system display

3. Rear seat entertainment system

controller

4. DVD player

5. Headphone input jacks

6. Input terminal adapter

7. Power outlet

8. Headphone volume control dials

9. Controller holder

10. Power outlet main switch

Rear seat entertainment system—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

244

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear seat entertainment system is de-

signed for the rear passengers to enjoy

audio and DVD video separately from the

front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated when the ignition key is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy all modes

(AM and FM radio, cassette tape player,

compact disc player with changer and

DVD player) on the rear seat entertain-

ment system only if a cassette tape and

a compact disc are loaded in the front

audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can

play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD

text, dts−CD or DVD audio only when a

disc is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when

your personal audio system is connected

to the input terminal adapter on the rear

console box. For details, refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment

system with commercial headphone. See

“—Headphone input jacks” in this Section

for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-

tainment system with a wireless head-

phone. The wireless headphone can be

used within rear seat. If the signal be-

comes weak, the headphone will mute.

For details, refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally

available in the market, it may be difficult

to catch sound properly. Toyota recom-

mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless

headphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphone

at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DDo not drive with using the head-

phone. Otherwise, you may be hard

to hear the sound from the outside

while using the headphone and may

cause an accident.

DConversational speech on some

DVDs is recorded at a low volume

to emphasize the impact of sound

effects. If you adjust the volume

assuming that the conversations

represent the maximum volume lev-

el that the DVD will play, you may

be startled by louder sound effects

or when you change to a different

audio source. Be sure to adjust the

volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-

creased, before you turn on the

headphone.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

245

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To open the display, push the lock release

button.

Push down the display to the desired

angle.

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with a

dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed

by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,

the surface of the screen may be

scratched.

To close, push up the display until you

hear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-

cally turned off when the display is

closed. However, the rear seat entertain-

ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, close the display when

it is not in use.

—Display

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

246

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

zThe screen should be cleaned with

a dry soft cloth. If the screen is

pushed by hand or wiped with a

hard cloth, the surface of the

screen may be scratched.

zBenzene or alkaline solutions may

damage the coated surface of the

screen.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not turn on the rear

seat entertainment system longer

than necessary when the engine is

not running.

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated with the rear seat entertain-

ment system controller. The system can-

not be operated by touching the switches

on the screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the

controller. It may cause an accident,

fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct

sunlight, high heat and high humidity.

These conditions could cause the

case to deform or the battery to ex-

plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER

(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-

ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-

vents the battery from being dis-

charged. Before using the controller,

remove the insulating sheet.

—Rear seat entertainment

system controller

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

247

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-

tem controller, direct the signal output

portion of the controller to the signal

reception portion of the rear seat enter-

tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properly

when the signal reception portion of the

display is exposed to direct sunlight.

Block the display from direct sunlight.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the

controller may be damaged.

zDo not drop or strongly knock the

controller against hard objects.

zDo not sit on or place heavy ob-

jects on the controller.

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in the

holder when it is not in use. The holder

can be hooked on the back of the driv-

er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, stow the controller in

the holder when it is not in use.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

248

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposed

to high temperatures (such as on the

instrument panel) for a long time,

otherwise the controller may be dam-

aged.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

249

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CONTROL BUTTONS

1. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

These buttons operate the front audio

system or select the track/chapter

when the DVD player is operated.

2. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

These buttons skip directly to a desired

preset station, disc, track or chapter.

3. “CURSOR” button

This button indicates the control

switches on the screen when the DVD

player is operated.

4. Joy stick

This joy stick selects a control switch,

mode switch on the screen or the

menu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switch

or the selected menu for the disc.

6. “SOURCE” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-

tertainment system and selects the

mode.

7. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,

contrast and brightness of the screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

250

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

8. “VIDEO” button

This button turns on the video mode

when your personal audio device is

connected.

9. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

10. “RETURN” button

This button skips to the predetermined

scene for the disc when the DVD play-

er is operated.

11. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set up

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

12. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title search

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

13. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of the

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

14. “""” button

This button fast forwards a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

15. “"” button

This button plays a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

16. “ ” button

This button pauses a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

17. “AA” button

This button reverse a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

18. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selection

screen for DVD video when the DVD

player is operated.

19. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-

dio screen when the DVD player is

operated.

20. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-

title screen when the DVD player is

operated.

21. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screen

for DVD video when the DVD player is

operated.

22. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-

tertainment system.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

251

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To turn on the system, push the

“SOURCE” button.

The screen indicates which mode can be

selected. Push the “DVD” or “VIDEO” button

when the connected DVD player or your

personal audio machine is on. The rear

seat entertainment system will be turned

on.

The rear seat entertainment system can se-

lect all the modes.

When a cassette tape, a compact disc, a

DVD video disc, an audio CD, a video

CD, a CD text, a dts−CD or a DVD audio

disc is not loaded on the front audio sys-

tem or the DVD player, only the radio

mode can be selected on the rear seat

entertainment system.

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”

button.

When the front audio system is turned off,

the rear audio system and the DVD player

will be turned off simultaneously.

All the modes of the front audio system

can be operated on the rear seat enter-

tainment system.

When the same mode is selected on the

front and rear audio systems simulta-

neously, the system can be operated on

the front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the front

and rear audio systems at the same time,

AM and FM modes cannot be changed on

the rear seat audio system.

—Turning the rear seat

entertainment system on and

off —Front audio system operation

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

252

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SELECTING THE MODE

Use the joy stick to select the mode.

Push the “ENT” button to enter the mode.

The mode display which is selected by

the joy stick is colored blue. When the

“ENT” button is pushed, the mode display

changes to green. If the mode display is

gray, it cannot be selected.

The “Speaker sound” on the mode display

is selected on the front audio system.

Radio

Cassette tape player and compact disc

player

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

253

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When you select a mode, the screen indi-

cates which is selected.

Radio

AM mode:

When you select the AM mode, “AM” will

appear on the screen.

FM mode:

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or

“FM2” will appear on the screen.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while this

mode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while this

mode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track and

disc number currently being played.

OPERATING FRONT AUDIO SYSTEM

To operate the front audio system, use

the following switches.

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-

tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations for

the band of the front audio system. (For

instructions, see “—Controls and features”

in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button. The radio will tune in the next

preset station up or down the band. The

station frequency will appear on the

screen.

Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button to select the other side of a cas-

sette tape. The screen indicates which

side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates

the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom

side.)

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape side, it

automatically reverses and begins to play

the other side. This is true whether the

cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Compact disc player with changer

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)

button until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

254

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”

(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you

push the button, the radio will step up or

down to another frequency. If you push

and hold the button, and the radio will go

into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or

down for a station of the nearest frequen-

cy and will stop on reception. Each time

you push the button, the stations will be

searched one after another.

Cassette tape player

This button has the following features—

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)

button until “FF” will appears on the dis-

play to forward a tape. Push and hold the

“” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”

appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

To stop the tape while it is rewinding,

push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play that same

side. If a tape fast forwards completely,

the cassette will play the other side of the

tape using the auto−reverse feature.

To skip up or down to locate a song or

recording:

You can select up to nine recordings (in-

cluding current one).

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the

screen.

Next, push either side of the track button

until the number on the screen reaches

the number of tracks you want to skip. If

you push the button 10 times, the skip

feature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly a

blank space of at least 3 seconds is con-

sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,

the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well

with some spoken, live, or classical re-

cordings.

Compact disc player

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to a different track:

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-

ton until the number of the track you want

to listen to appears on the display. If you

want to return to the beginning of the

current track, quickly push the “ ”

(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/

TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse

within a compact disc. When you release

the button, the compact disc player will

resume playing.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

255

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that

small children do not swallow the re-

moved battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by a Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the following

procedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing the

lock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put in a new battery with the positive

(+) side up.

Put it in the case securely.

NOTICE

zBe sure that the positive side of

the controller battery is facing cor-

rectly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the controller, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

256

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

of the controller battery insertion

and that dust or oil does not ad-

here to the transmitter case.

zClose the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

controller operates properly. If the control-

ler still does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

The DVD player is set in the console

box.

The DVD player can play audio CDs,

DVD video discs, CD texts, dts−CDs

and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see

“Audio/video system operating hints”.

To access the DVD player, pull up the

console box lid while pushing the lock

release button.

The DVD player works when the ignition

key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must

be loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display one of the three following

error messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on the

screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,

damaged or it was inserted upside down.

Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen: It indicates that the DVD re-

gion code is not set properly.

—DVD player

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

257

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If “DVD ERROR” appears on the

screen: There is a problem inside the

player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

INSERTING THE DISC

To open the DVD player, push the lid

backward.

Insert a disc and push the lid forward

to close the DVD player.

When you insert a disc, push it in gently

with the label side up.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot

be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”

and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,

“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the

screen. For appropriate discs for this play-

er, see “Audio/video system operating

hints”.

The player is intended for the use with 12

cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

258

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The indicator light turns on while the disc

is loaded.

The player will play the track or chapter,

and it will play from the beginning of the

track or chapter again after it reaches the

end.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the DVD player. Do not insert

anything other than a disc into the

slot.

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the lid backward to open the DVD

player. Push the disc eject button to

eject a disc.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

—Selecting the DVD mode

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

259

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To select the DVD mode, push the

“DVD” button on the controller.

You can also select the DVD mode on the

mode selection screen mentioned above.

Vehicles with navigation system—The

“DVD Hint!” screen appears when the

DVD mode is first selected after you

turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

Push the “OK” switch when you read the

message.

The DVD player can be operated with the

controller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “MENU” button

3. “TOP MENU” button

4. “RETURN” button

5. “SET UP” button

6. “SEARCH” button

7. “ANGLE” button

8. “AUDIO” button

9. “SUB TITLE” button

10. “ ”, “"”, “AA” and “""” buttons

—DVD player operation

switches

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

260

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The player can also be operated with the

switches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,

select the switch by the joy stick and

push the “ENT” button. You cannot select

the switches on the screen by touching

them directly.

When the switch is selected by the joy

stick, the outline of the switch changes to

blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the

switch will be highlighted in green.

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES

ON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, push

the “CURSOR” button on the controller.

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operation

switch)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

261

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Top page (DVD audio operation switch)

Second page (DVD audio operation

switch)

Top page (video CD)

Second page (video CD)

There are operation switches on the “Top

Page” and “Second Page” screens.

To change the screen, push the “Top

Page” or “Second Page” switch on the

screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

262

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If “ ” appears on the screen when

you select a switch, it indicates that

the switch cannot work.

To turn off the switches on the screen,

push the “CURSOR” button on the control-

ler once again or push the “Hide Keys” on

the screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

263

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTE: The playback condition of some

DVD video discs may be determined by

a DVD video software producer. This

DVD player plays a disc as the software

producer intended. So, some functions

may not work properly. Be sure to read

the instruction manual for the DVD vid-

eo disc separately provided. For de-

tailed information about DVD video

discs, see “—DVD video disc informa-

tion” in this Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, DVD

audio, video CD or audio tracks may not

record in some cases while the menu is

displayed. As audio will not play in this

case, verify that the video tracks are play-

ing and then activate playback.

When playback of a disc is completed:

DIf an audio CD is playing, the first

track starts.

DIf a DVD video, DVD audio or video

CD is playing, playback will stop or the

menu screen will be displayed.

The title/chapter number and playback

time display may not appear while playing

back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDs

is recorded at a low volume to em-

phasize the impact of sound effects.

If you adjust the volume assuming

that the conversations represent the

maximum volume level available for

the DVD, you may be startled by

louder sound effects or when you

change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant

impact on the human body or pose a

driving hazard. Keep this in mind

when you adjust the volume.

DVD video

DVD audio

—DVD player operation (DVD

video/DVD audio)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

264

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE

DISC ON OR OFF

DVD video—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,

push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch

on the screen. You can also turn on the

menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or

“TOP MENU” switch on the controller.

DVD audio—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,

push the “Top Menu” switch on the

screen. You can also turn on the menu

screen by pushing the “TOP MENU”

switch on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the separate manual for the DVD disc.

To turn on the selecting switch, push the

“” switch.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

265

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To select the menu for the disc, push the

“”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” switches on the

screen. Push the “Enter” switch to select

the menu for the disc.

You can also select the menu for the disc

by the joy stick and the “ENT” button on

the controller when the control switches

are not indicated on the screen.

Push the “Shift Keys” on the screen, and

the switches (“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “Enter”

and “Shift Keys” switches) will move up

and down.

To turn off the switch, push the “OFF”

switch on the screen. To turn on the

switch again, push the “ON” switch on the

screen.

To return to the previous screen, push the

“Back” switch on the screen.

DVD video

DVD audio

OPERATING THE “”, “"”, “AA” AND

“""” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“” switch/button: Push this switch/button

to pause the disc.

“"” switch/button: Push this switch/button to

cancel the pause and return to normal play-

ing.

“AA” and “""” switches/buttons: Push

and hold the “AA” or “""” switch/button

to fast forward or reverse. When you re-

lease the switch/button, the DVD player

will resume playing.

DVD video only—

Push the “AA” or “""” switch/button

while pausing, the DVD video plays the

slow−motion video replay or the slow−mo-

tion video replay in reverse.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

266

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DVD video

DVD audio

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED

SCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, push

the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts

playing from the beginning of the predeter-

mined screen. You can also display the

screen by pushing the “RETURN” button

on the controller.

For further details of the predetermined

screen, see the separate manual for the

DVD disc.

DVD video

DVD audio

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

267

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP

To display the searching title (DVD video)

or group (DVD audio) screen, push the

“Search” switch on the screen. You can

also display the screen by pushing the

“SEARCH” button on the controller.

DVD video

DVD audio

DVD video—

Select the title number by using the “−”,

“+” and “+10” switches and push the “En-

ter” switch to enter the number. The play-

er starts playing disc for that title number.

The selected title number will appear on

the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

DVD audio—

Enter the group number by using the “−”

and “+” switches. The selected group

number will appear on the screen. Push

the “Enter” switch. The player starts play-

ing the disc from the entered group num-

ber.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

268

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

DVD audio only—

Enter the bonus group number on the

searching group screen and push the “En-

ter” switch. The “Enter Key Code” screen

will appear. To enter the number of the

group you want to play, push the group

number. If you enter the wrong number,

push the “Clear” switch to delete the num-

ber.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen.

The player starts playing the disc from the

selected bonus group number.

CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE

DVD audio only—

Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switch

on the screen to forward or reverse the

still pictures.

DVD video

DVD audio

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

269

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,

and then the changing subtitle language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”

button on the controller.

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,

another language stored on the disc is

selected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide”

switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

The selected subtitle language will appear

on the screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

270

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE (DVD

video only)

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen

and then the changing audio language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button

on the controller.

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,

another language stored on the disc is

selected.

The selected audio language will appear

on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

271

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING AUDIO FORMAT (DVD audio

only)

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen or

the “AUDIO” button on the controller and

the changing audio format screen will ap-

pear.

Each time you touch the “Audio” switch,

another audio format stored on the disc is

selected.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

DVD video

DVD audio

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

272

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,

and then the changing angle screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the

controller.

The angle can be selected for discs that

are multi−angle compatible when the

“” mark appears on the screen. Each

time you push the “Angle” switch, the

angle changes. The angle number which

you can select will appear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

DVD video

DVD audio

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

273

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

Setup Menu 1 screen

Setup Menu 2 screen

There are initial setting switches on the

“Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2”

screens.

To change the screen, push the “Top

Page” or “Second Page” switch on the

screen.

After you change the initial setting, push

the “Enter” switch. The initial setting

switch will be turned off and return to the

picture previously.

When the “Initial Setting” switch on “Setup

Menu 2” is pushed, all menus are initial-

ized.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

274

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Lang.” switch on the

“Setup Menu 1” and the “Select Audio

Language” screen appear.

Select the language you want to hear on

the screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to

hear, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter

Audio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language you

want to hear, push the number of the

language code. For details about the lan-

guage codes, see the language code list.

If you enter a wrong number, push the

“Clear” switch to delete the number.

If numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,

the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.

Push the language code you want to hear

again.

To return to the “Select Audio Language”

screen, push the “Back” switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”,

push the “Subtitle Lang.” switch on the

“Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read on

the screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to

read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter

Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

275

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, push the number of the

language code. For details about the lan-

guage codes, see the language code list.

If you enter a wrong number, push the

“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If

numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,

the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.

Push the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Language”

screen, push the “DVD Language” switch on

the “Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to

read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter

DVD Language Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, push the number of the

language code. For details about the lan-

guage codes, see the language code list.

If you enter a wrong number, push the

“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If

numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,

the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.

Push the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select DVD Language”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

276

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR

OFF

The angle mark can be turned on for

discs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”

switch on the screen, the angle mark

turns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER

RESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen by

setting the viewer restrictions. You can

prevent the restriction with a password.

Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, push

the “Parental” switch on the “Setup Menu

1” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”

screen will appear.

Push the number for the password and

the “Enter” switch. The “Select Restriction

Level” screen will appear.

If you enter a wrong number, push the

“Clear” switch to delete the number.

You cannot change the setting without in-

putting the password. When you forget or

change the password, push the “Clear”

switch ten times to initialize the password.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

277

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller

the level number, the stricter the age limit.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

“Setup Menu 1” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Each time you push the “Display Mode”

switch on the “Setup Menu 2” screen, the

display mode is changed from wide mode

to auto mode.

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

278

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

279

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Ta mi l

2005 Te l ug u

2007 Ta j i k

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Ta t ar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

280

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the “ ”

or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button on the con-

troller until the number of the chapter/

track you want to select appears on the

screen.

DVD video

DVD audio

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The control screen

will appear on the screen.

Details of the specific switches, controls

and features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off

the control screen and return to the

picture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RPT” switch while the track

is playing. When the track ends, it will

automatically replay. To turn off the re-

peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RAND” switch. The player

will play the tracks on the disc in ran-

dom order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player

will scan all the tracks on the disc you

are listening to. To stop scanning, push

this switch again. If the player scanned

all the tracks on the disc, it will stop

scanning.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

281

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch

to fast forward or reverse a disc. When

you release the switch, the DVD player

will resume playing.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER

(video CD only)

Push the “Sel. Number” switch and then

the disc menu number search screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “SEARCH” switch on the

controller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the

“−”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the

“Enter” switch. The player starts playing

the disc from the entered disc menu num-

ber. The entered disc menu number will

appear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

Move up and down the switches by push-

ing “Shift keys” on the screen.

—DVD player operation (video

CD/audio CD/CD text)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

282

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATING THE “ ”, “"”, “AA” AND

“""” SWITCHES

“” switch: Push this switch to pause the

disc.

“"” switch: Push this switch to cancel the

pause and return to normal playing.

“AA” and “""” switches: Push this

switch to fast forward or reverse. When

you release the switch/button, the DVD

player will resume playing.

Video CD only—

Push the “""” switch/button while paus-

ing, the video CD plays the slow−motion

video replay.

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video

CD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the

menu screen for the disc. You can also

turn on the menu screen by pushing the

“RETURN” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the manual for the video CD.

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK

(video CD only)

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. Menu

Prev.” switch while the disc menu is dis-

played. The next or previous page will

appear on the screen.

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. Menu

Prev.” switch while the player is playing

video. The next or previous track will be

searched and played.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

283

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHANGING A MULTIPLEX

TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a

multiplex transmission. The mode changes

from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back

to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”

switch.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video

CD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”

in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

Video CD

Audio CD

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

284

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CD text

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The control screen

will appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear on

the screen when pushing the “DVD” but-

ton.

Details of the specific switches, controls

and features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch (video CD only)

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off

the control screen and return to the

picture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the track

is playing. When the track ends, it will

automatically replay. To turn off the re-

peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (audio CD and

CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The player

will play the tracks on the disc in ran-

dom order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and

CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player

will scan all the tracks on the disc. To

stop scanning, push this switch again.

When the player has scanned all the

tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-

ning.

5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push the “ ” or “ ” switch to fast

forward or reverse the disc. When you

push the switch again, the DVD player

will resume playing.

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone

and brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” switch on the control-

ler and then the “Display” screen will ap-

pear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect the

sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

—Screen adjustment

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

285

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Each time you push the “+” or “−” switch,

you can adjust the color, contrast, tone

and brightness of the screen.

+ or

GREEN − or RED

COLOR

Strengthens

the green

color

Strengthens

the red

color

CONTRAST Strengthens

the contrast

Weakens

the contrast

TONE Strengthens

the tone

Weakens

the tone

BRIGHTNESS Brightens Darkens

After adjusting the screen, push the “OK”

switch to return to the previous screen.

—Selecting the video mode

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

286

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The audio machine connected to the input

terminal adapter can be played in the

video mode.

To select the video mode, push the

“VIDEO” button on the controller. You can

also select the video mode on the mode

selection screen mentioned above.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-

or TV formats. DVD video discs con-

forming to other formats such as PAL

or SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs

have a region code indicating where you

can use. If the DVD video disc is not

labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in

this DVD player. If you attempt to play an

inappropriate DVD video disc in this play-

er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen. Even if the DVD video disc

does not have a region code, in some

cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC format

of color TV.

Indicates the number

of audio tracks.

Indicates the number

of language subtitles.

Indicates the number

of angles.

Indicates the screen

to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in

which this video disc

can be played.

ALL: all countries

Number: region code

—DVD video disc information

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

287

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc

that holds video. DVD video discs have

adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-

dards of digital compression technologies.

The picture data is compressed by 1/40

on average and stored. Variable rate en-

coded technology in which the volume of

data assigned to the picture is changed

depending on the picture format has also

been adopted. Audio data is stored using

PCM and Dolby digital, which enables

higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-

ti−angle and multi−language features will

also help you enjoy the more advanced

technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits

what can be viewed in conformity with the

level of restrictions of the country. The

level of restrictions varies depending on

the DVD video disc. Some DVD video

discs cannot be played at all, or violent

scenes are skipped or replaced with other

scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can

be played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children

and G−rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can

be played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the

same scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can select

the language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are provided

on DVD players and DVD discs. If the

DVD video disc does not have the same

region code as the DVD player, you can-

not play the disc on the DVD player. For

region codes.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner

PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio

format DVD. Other decoded type cannot

be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-

grams stored on DVD video discs are di-

vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and

audio programs stored on DVD video

discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one

album, or one audio program is assigned

as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title

comprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and

the double−D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-

lished works.

E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All

rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright

protection technology that is protected

by method claims of certain U.S. pat-

ents and other intellectual property

rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-

tion and other rights owners. Use of

this copyright protection technology

must be authorized by Macrovision Cor-

poration, and is intended for home and

other limited viewing uses only unless

otherwise authorized by Macrovision

Corporation. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

288

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The rear entertainment system plays vid-

eos and sound when your audio system

is connected to the input terminal adapter

on the rear console box. For details, refer

to the manufacturer’s instructions.

To use the input terminal adapter, open

the lid.

The input terminal adapter is composed of

3 input terminal adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

Red: Audio input adapter

White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the input terminal adapter lid

when the input terminal adapter is not

in use. Inserting anything other than

an appropriate plug that fits the

adapter may cause electrical failure or

short circuit.

This power outlet is designed for use as

a power supply for the audio device con-

nected to the input terminal adapter.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

—Input terminal adapter —Power outlet

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

289

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate

plug that fits the outlet may cause

electrical failure or short circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even if

their power consumption is under 115

VAC/100W. These appliances may not

operate properly.

DAppliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

DMeasuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

DOther appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

290

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

You can enjoy the rear seat entertain-

ment system with commercial head-

phones.

To use the headphones, connect them to

the jack.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,

turn the knob. Turn right to increase the

volume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on the

type of headphones.

With some headphones generally available

in the marker, it may be difficult to catch

sound properly. Toyota recommends the

use of Toyota genuine headphone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connect

the headphones to the jack. Loud

sounds may have a significant impact

on the human body.

—Headphone input jacks

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

291

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video system

operations:

zBe careful not to spill beverages

over the audio system.

zDo not put anything other than a

cassette tape or Compact Disc into

the slot.

zDo not put anything other than a

DVD video, DVD audio, video CD,

dts−CD and audio CD into the DVD

player.

zThe use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the au-

dio system which you are listening

to. However, this does not indicate

a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

your radio—it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or telephone wires can interfere with

AM signals. And of course, radio signals

have a limited range. The farther you are

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

lem with your radio:

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 40 km (25

miles). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for two signals to reach

your antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

er out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you

are listening to is interrupted or weak-

ened, and there is another strong station

nearby on the FM band, your radio may

tune in the second station until the origi-

nal signal can be picked up again.

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere—especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound

alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a

radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening, or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

Audio/video system operating

hints

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

292

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

AND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-

sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-

larly.

DA dirty tape head or tape path can

decrease sound quality and tangle your

cassette tapes. The easiest way to

clean them is by using a cleaning tape.

(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

DLow−quality cassette tapes can cause

many problems, including poor sound,

inconsistent playing speed, and

constant auto−reversing. They can also

get stuck or tangled in the cassette

player.

DDo not use a cassette if it has been

damaged or tangled or if its label is

peeling off.

DDo not leave a cassette in the player

if you are not listening to it, especially

if it is hot outside.

DStore cassettes in their cases and out

of direct sunlight.

DAvoid using cassettes with a total play-

ing time longer than 100 minutes (50

minutes per side). The tape used in

these cassettes is thin and could get

stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

PLAYER AND DISCS

DType 2 and 3—Your compact disc play-

er is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7

in.) discs only.

DExtremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player from working.

On hot days, use the air conditioning

to cool the vehicle interior before you

listen to a disc.

DBumpy roads or other vibrations may

cause your compact disc player to

skip.

DIf moisture gets into your compact disc

player, you may not hear any sound

even though your compact disc player

appears to be working. Remove the

disc from the player and wait until it

dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisible

laser beam which could cause hazard-

ous radiation exposure if directed

outside the unit. Be sure to operate

the player correctly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

293

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Compact disc player

DUse only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products

may not be playable on your compact

disc player.

Copy−protected CD

CD−R (CD−Recordable)

CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)

CD−ROM

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD audio discs

Video CDs

DVD player

DUse only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your DVD player.

SACD

Copy−protected CD

CD−R (CD−Recordable)

CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)

CD−ROM

DVD−R

DVD+R

DVD+RW

DVD−RW

DVD−ROM

DVD−RAM

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

294

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-

ent/translucent, low quality or labeled

discs such as those shown in the il-

lustrations. The use of such discs

may damage the player or changer, or

it may be impossible to eject the

disc.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

295

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Correct Wrong

DHandle compact discs carefully, espe-

cially when you are inserting them.

Hold them on the edge and do not

bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints

on them, particularly on the shiny side.

DDirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the

player to skip or to repeat a section of

a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the

disc up to the light.)

DRemove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not listening to

them. Store them in their plastic cases

away from moisture, heat, and direct

sunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a

soft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-

ened with water. Wipe in a straight line

from the center to the edge of the disc

(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,

lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional

record cleaner or anti−static device.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

296

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

297

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Controls 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel and rear vents 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

298

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. Temperature selector

3. Air flow selector

4. “A/C” button (on some models)

5. Air intake selector button

Controls

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

299

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to

the right to increase, to the left to de-

crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—

to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used for

air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the

instrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

It is recommended that you close the

lower vent. For details about this, see

“Instrument panel vents” in this Sec-

tion.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the

floor/windshield position turns on the

defogging function with the purpose of

clearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to

RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again.

It is recommended that you close the

lower vent. For details about this, see

“Instrument panel and rear vents” in

this Section.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the front view more quickly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

300

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the

windshield position turns on the defog-

ging function with the purpose of clear-

ing the front view.

In this position, air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically

to clean up the front view quickly. It is

not possible to return to RECIRCULATE

in this position.

It is recommended that you close the

lower vent. For details about this, see

“Instrument panel vents” in this Sec-

tion.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below.

Air intake selector button

The air intake selector button is used to

switch the air intake FRESH mode that

draws outside air into the system and

RECIRCULATED mode that recirculates

the air inside vehicle.

To turn the air source to RECIRCULATED

mode, press the button. The indicator will

come on. To turn the air source to FRESH

mode, press the button again. The indica-

tor will go off.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button (on some models)

To turn on the air conditioning, press the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your

vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

301

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Air flow selector settings

"Standard and access cab models without rear console box

: See “Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

302

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

"Standard and access cab models with rear console box

: See “Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

∗: On some models

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

303

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DTo cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

DMake sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could

fog up because of the difference in air

temperature on the inside and outside

of the windshield.

DKeep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate through-

out the vehicle.

DOn cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

DWhen driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed selector to

any setting except “OFF”.

"Double cab models

: See “Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

Operating tips

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

304

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DIf following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—To w ar d s WARM

(red zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Lower vent—CLOSED

Air conditioning—OFF

DFor quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been

warmed.

DPress the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

DChoose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—To w ar d s COLD

(blue zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

DFor quick cooling, move the air intake

selector to recirculate for a few min-

utes.

Ventilation

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—To w ar d s COLD

(blue zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging

The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—To w ar d s WARM (red

zone) to heat; COLD

(blue zone) to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Lower vent—CLOSED

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-

shield or floor/windshield position turns on

the defogging function and fun speed may

increase with the purpose of clearing the

front view.

When turning the air flow selector to

windshield position, the air intake selects

FRESH automatically. This is to clean up

the front view more quickly. It is not

possible to return to RECIRCULATE in

this position.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

305

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—To w ar d s WARM

(red zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Lower vent—CLOSED

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-

shield or floor/windshield position turns on

the defrosting function and fun speed may

with the purpose of clearing the front

view.

When turning the air flow selector to

windshield position, the air intake selects

FRESH automatically. This is to clean up

the front view more quickly. It is not

possible to return to RECIRCULATE in

this position.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

DTo heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose floor/

windshield air flow.

Side vents

Lower vent

Instrument panel and rear

vents

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

306

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Rear vents (double cab models only)

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel and rear vents. The

instrument panel and rear vents may be

opened or closed as shown.

For removing frost or fog, it is recom-

mended that you close the lower vent

when using the “Floor”, “Floor/Windshield”

or “Windshield” mode.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

339

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR

TOYOTA

Information before driving your Toyota

Off−road vehicle precautions 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Break−in period 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut off system 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three−way catalytic converters 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium−tipped spark plugs 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear step bumper 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

StepSide bed 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limited−slip differential 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Toyota’s identification 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire information 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle load limits 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo and luggage 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

340

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This vehicle has higher ground clear-

ance and narrower tread in relation to

the height of its center of gravity to

make it capable of performing in a wide

variety of off−road applications. Specific

design characteristics give it a higher

center of gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design feature

causes this type of vehicle to be more

likely to rollover. And, it has a signifi-

cantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. An advantage of the

higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road allowing you to antici-

pate problems. It is not designed for

cornering at the same speeds as ordi-

nary passenger cars any more than

low−slung sports cars designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off−road

conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at

excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

DIn a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

DAvoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover causing death or serious

injury.

DAvoid loading any items on the roof

that will raise the vehicle’s center

of gravity.

DAlways slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and

higher center of gravity, your ve-

hicle is more sensitive to side

winds than an ordinary passenger

car. Slowing down will allow you to

have better control.

Off−road vehicle precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

341

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DWhen driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

DDo not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your ve-

hicle (or any similar off−road ve-

hicle) can tip over sideways much

more easily than forward or back-

ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break−in. But following a few simple tips

for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add

to the future economy and long life of

your vehicle:

DAvoid full throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.

DAvoid racing the engine.

DTry to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).

DDo not drive slowly with the manual

transmission in a high gear.

DDo not drive for a long time at any

single speed, either fast or slow.

DDo not tow a trailer during the first 800

km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-

leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your

Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.

The special nozzle on pumps with un-

leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-

dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use

should meet specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93

in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

leaded gasoline will cause the three−

way catalytic converter to lose its ef-

fectiveness and the emission control

system to function improperly. Also,

this can increase maintenance costs.

Break−in period Fuel

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

342

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

OCTANE RATING

1GR−FE engine: Select Octane Rating

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or

higher. For improved vehicle

performance, the use of premium

unleaded gasoline with an Octane

Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number

96) or higher is recommended.

2UZ−FE engine: Select Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating or research octane number lower

than stated above will cause persistent

heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will

lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when

using the recommended fuel, or if you

hear steady knocking while holding a

steady speed on level roads, consult your

Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice

light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving up hills. This is normal

and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT

ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to

avoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.

contains detergent additives to keep clean

and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,

Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for quality fuel named

World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that

is expected to be applied world wide.

The WWFC consists of four categories

that depend on required emission lev-

els. In the U.S., category 4 has been

adopted. The WWFC improves air quali-

ty by providing for better emissions in

vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction

through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-

formulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE is

available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner

burning gasoline and appropriately blended

reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-

oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-

mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-

prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate

blended gasoline where the oxygenate

content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your

Toyota, be sure that it has an octane

rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing methanol.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

343

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-

taining MMT is used, your emission con-

trol system may be adversely affected.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-

strument cluster may come on. If this hap-

pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-

vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience

driveability problems caused by the partic-

ular gasoline that you are using. If you

continue to have unacceptable driveability,

try changing gasoline brands. If this does

not rectify your problem, then consult your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

zDo not use gasohol other than

stated above. It will cause fuel sys-

tem damage or vehicle performance

problems.

zIf driveability problems occur (poor

hot starting, vaporizing, engine

knock, etc.), discontinue the use.

zTake care not to spill gasohol dur-

ing refueling. Gasohol may cause

paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine to minimize the

risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls

or an airbag inflates upon collision. To

restart the engine after the fuel pump shut

off system activates, turn the ignition

switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start

it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle

before restarting the engine. If you

find that liquid has leaked onto the

ground, it is the fuel system has

been damaged and it is in need of

repair. In this case, do not restart the

engine.

Fuel pump shut off system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

344

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If you plan to drive your Toyota in

another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration

laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

number).

1GR−FE engine

2UZ−FE engine

The three−way catalytic converter is an

emission control device installed in the

exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

DKeep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe

while the engine is running. The

exhaust gas is very hot.

DDo not idle or park your vehicle

over anything that might burn easi-

ly such as grass, leaves, paper or

rags.

Operation in foreign countries Three−way catalytic converters

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

345

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases

flowing into the three−way catalytic

converter may cause it to overheat

and create a fire hazard. To prevent

this and other damage, observe the

following precautions:

zUse only unleaded gasoline.

zDo not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, creat-

ing an excessive load on the three−

way catalytic converter.

zDo not allow the engine to run at

idle speed for more than 20 minu-

tes.

zAvoid racing the engine.

zDo not push−start or pull−start your

vehicle.

zDo not turn off the ignition while

the vehicle is moving.

zKeep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engine

electrical system, electronic ignition

system/distributor ignition system

or fuel systems could cause an ex-

tremely high three−way catalytic

converter temperature.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, take your

vehicle in for a check−up as soon

as possible. Remember, your Toyota

dealer knows your vehicle and its

three−way catalytic converter sys-

tem best.

zTo ensure that the three−way cata-

lytic converter and the entire emis-

sion control system operate proper-

ly, your vehicle must receive the

periodic inspections required by the

Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For

scheduled maintenance information,

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.

CAUTION

DAvoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which

is a colorless and odorless gas. It

can cause unconsciousness or even

death.

DMake sure the exhaust system has

no holes or loose connections. The

system should be checked from

time to time. If you hit something,

or notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust, have the system

checked immediately.

DDo not run the engine in a garage

or enclosed area except for the

time needed to drive the vehicle in

or out. The exhaust gases cannot

escape, making this a particularly

dangerous situation.

DDo not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine run-

ning. If it is unavoidable, however,

do so only in an unconfined area

and adjust the heating or cooling

system to force outside air into the

vehicle.

Engine exhaust cautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

346

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DTo allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the inlet grilles in front of the wind-

shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-

er obstructions.

DIf you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, drive with the windows

open. Have the cause immediately

located and corrected.

DToyota does not recommend occu-

pying the rear cargo area when it

is fitted with a slide−in camper,

camper shell or other type cover

while the engine is running. This

caution applies to both driving and

stopped or parked situations with

the engine running. Particular care

should be taken to prevent exhaust

gases from entering camper bodies,

trailers or other enclosures on or

around your vehicle. If exhaust

fumes are detected, open all win-

dows and thoroughly ventilate the

area.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of

lubricating and cooling the inside of the

engine, and plays a major role in main-

taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-

sume some engine oil during normal

engine operation. The causes of oil

consumption in a normal engine are as

follows.

DOil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil

is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-

ton moves downwards in the cylinder.

High negative pressure generated when

the vehicle is decelerating sucks some

of this oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil as well as some part of the oil

film left on the cylinder wall is burned

by the high temperature combustion

gases during the combustion process.

DOil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil

is sucked into the combustion chamber

together with the intake air and is

burned along with the fuel. High tem-

perature exhaust gases also burn the

oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve

stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-

pends on the viscosity of the oil, the

quality of the oil and the conditions the

vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-

ing and frequent acceleration and decel-

eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since

its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls

have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000

km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600

miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-

sumption, note that the oil may become

diluted and make it difficult to judge

the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for

repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-

mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not

show any drop in the oil level at all, even

after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This

is because the oil is gradually becoming

diluted with fuel or moisture, making it

appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out

when the vehicle is then driven at high

speeds, as on an expressway, making it

appear that oil is excessively consumed

after driving at high speeds.

Facts about engine oil

consumption

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

347

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

One of the most important points in prop-

er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-

gine oil at the optimum level so that oil

function will not be impaired. Therefore, it

is essential that the oil level be checked

regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil

level be checked every time you refuel

the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly

could lead to serious engine trouble

due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,

see “Checking the engine oil level” in Sec-

tion 7−2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs

and do not adjust gaps for your en-

gine performance and smooth drive-

ability.

Without the vehicle stability control

system—

The tandem master cylinder brake system

is a hydraulic system with two separate

sub−systems. If either sub−system should

fail, the other will still work. However, the

pedal will be harder to press, and your

stopping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

With the vehicle stability control sys-

tem—

This brake system has 2 independent hy-

draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,

the other will still work. However, the ped-

al will be harder to press, and your stop-

ping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs

(2UZ−FE engine) Brake system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

348

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

BRAKE BOOSTER (without the vehicle

stability control system)

The brake booster uses engine vacuum to

power−assist the brakes. If the engine

should quit while you are driving, you can

bring the vehicle to a stop with normal

pedal pressure. There is enough reserved

vacuum for one or two stops—but no

more!

CAUTION

DDo not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the

pedal uses up your reserved vacu-

um.

DEven if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

BRAKE BOOSTER (with the vehicle sta-

bility control system)

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-

surized by the pump to power−assist the

brakes. If the brake booster fails during

driving, the brake system warning light

comes on and buzzer sounds continuous-

ly. In this case, the brakes may not work

properly. If they do not work well, depress

the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system

warning light comes on, immediately stop

your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-

er.

The brake system warning light may stay

on for about 60 seconds after the ignition

key is turned to the “ON” position. It is

normal if the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the brake system warning

light and buzzer. It is normal if the light

turns off and the buzzer stops sounding

after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine

compartment after the engine is started or

the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.

This is a pump pulsating sound of the

brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

DDo not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the

pedal uses up your brake fluid

pressure reserve.

DEven if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (without

the vehicle stability control system)

The anti−lock brake system is designed

to help prevent lock−up of the wheels

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces. This assists in

providing directional stability and steer-

ing performance of the vehicle under

these circumstances.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

349

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti−lock brake system

function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.

In this situation, to let the anti−lock

brake system work for you, just hold the

brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake in a panic stop. This

will result in reduced braking performan-

ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-

tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in

the engine compartment for a few seconds

when the engine is started or just after

the vehicle begins to move. This means

that the anti−lock brake system is in the

self−check mode, and does not indicate a

malfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following conditions may

occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-

tion of the system:

DYou may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal

pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-

hicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

DAt the end of the anti−lock brake sys-

tem activation, the brake pedal may

move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lock

brake system: Although the anti−lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti−

lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti−lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

350

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti−lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

DDriving on rough, gravel or snow−

covered roads.

DDriving with tire chains installed.

DDriving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

DDriving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti−lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” Warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−

lock brake system works properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds. There-

after, if the system malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

but the brake system still operates con-

ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels could lock up during

a sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

somewhere in the components moni-

tored by the warning light system. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

351

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with the

vehicle stability control system)

The anti−lock brake system is designed

to help prevent lock−up of the wheels

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces. This assists in

providing directional stability and steer-

ing performance of the vehicle under

these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti−lock brake system

function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.

In this situation, to let the anti−lock

brake system work for you, just hold the

brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake in a panic stop. This

will result in reduced braking performan-

ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-

tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in

the engine compartment for a few seconds

when the engine is started or just after

the vehicle begins to move. This means

that the anti−lock brake system is in the

self− check mode, and does not indicate

a malfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following conditions may

occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-

tion of the system:

DYou may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal

pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-

hicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

DAt the end of the anti−lock brake sys-

tem activation, the brake pedal may

move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lock

brake system: Although the anti−lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti−

lock brake system on.

If tires grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti−lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

352

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti−lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

DDriving on rough, gravel or snow−

covered roads.

DDriving with tire chains installed.

DDriving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

DDriving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti−lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speed. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−

lock brake system and the brake assist

system work properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the

systems malfunctions, the light comes on

again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system, the brake assist

system, the traction control system,

“AUTO LSD” system, the vehicle stability

control system do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels could lock up during

a sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

“VSC TRC” warning light may come on

with the “ABS” warning light (brake assist

system warning light) when there is a mal-

function somewhere in the anti−lock brake

system (brake assist system).

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

353

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If either of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

somewhere in the components moni-

tored by the warning light system. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

DThe light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

DDepressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

turns off after about a few seconds.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (with the ve-

hicle stability control system)

When you slam the brakes on, the

brake assist system judges as an emer-

gency stop and provides more powerful

braking for a driver who cannot hold

down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-

erful braking will be applied. At this time,

you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment and feel the vibrations of the

brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-

tive after the vehicle has accelerated to

a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-

ing light, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” in Section 1−6.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

354

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The brake pad wear limit indicators on

your disc brakes give a warning noise

when the brake pads are worn to where

replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise

while driving, have the brake pads

checked and replaced by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-

tor damage can result if the pads are not

replaced when necessary.

The rear step bumper is for rear end

protection and easier step−up loading.

CAUTION

DDo not allow more than one person

to get on the rear step bumper at

a time. It is designed for only one

person.

DNever drive the vehicle with anyone

on the rear step bumper.

The side step is for easier step−up

CAUTION

For models equipped with a StepSide

bed:

DDo not allow more than one person

to get on the side step. Do not

exceed the maximum weight limit of

136 kg (300 lb.) on the side step.

DNever drive the vehicle with anyone

on the side steps.

DDo not stand on the side steps

while the vehicle is moving.

Brake pad wear limit

indicators Rear step bumper StepSide bed

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

355

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Some Toyotas are equipped with a lim-

ited−slip differential. If one of the rear

wheels begins to spin, the limited−slip dif-

ferential is designed to aid traction by

automatically transmitting driving force to

the other rear wheel. If you are not sure

whether your vehicle is equipped with one,

you can ask your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by a jack.

The vehicle could be driven off the

jack and could pose a danger or re-

sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the same

size, construction and load capacity

as the original tires on your Toyota

because damage to the limited−slip

differential could possibly occur with

another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This number is on the left top of the

instrument panel, and can be seen

through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number

for your Toyota. It is used in registering

the ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

also on the Certification Label.

Limited−slip differential

Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification number

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

356

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1GR−FE engine

2UZ−FE engine

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-

tion labels which are approximately 47

mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce

the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-

ing the tracing and recovery of parts from

stolen vehicles. The label is designed so

that once it is applied to a surface, any

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring

these labels intact from one part to anoth-

er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the

theft prevention labels as it may vio-

late certain state or federal laws.

—Engine number

Theft prevention labels

(except for Canada)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

357

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It

can cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Suspension and chassis

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

358

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This illustration indicates typical tire

symbols.

1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” in this Section.

2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see

“—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)” in this Section.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—

For details, see “Uniform tire quali-

ty grading” that follows

4. The location of the tread wear

indicators—For details, see

“Checking and replacing tires” in

Section 7−2.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-

rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-

ber−coated parallel cords. Cords

mean the strands forming the plies

in the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A

radial tire has “RADIAL” on the

sidewall. A tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

Tire information—

—Tire symbols

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

359

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE

TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not

have a tube inside the tire and air

is directly filled in the tire. A tube

type tire has a tube inside the tire

and the tube maintains the air

pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tire

inflation pressure—For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

in Section 7−2.

9. Maximum cold tire inflation

pressure—This means the pres-

sure to which a tire may be in-

flated. For details about recom-

mended cold tire inflation

pressure, see “Tires” in Section 8.

10.Summer tire or all season

tire—An all season tire has “M+S”

on the sidewall. The tire not

marked with “M+S” is a summer

tire. For details, see “Types of

tires” in this Section.

This illustration indicates typical DOT

and Tire Identification Number (TIN).

1. “DOT” symbol

2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)

3. Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

4. Tire size code

5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type

code

6. Manufacturing week

7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

360

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This illustration indicates typical tire

size.

1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)

2. Section width (in millimeters)

3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)

4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)

5. Wheel diameter (in inches)

6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width

2. Tire height

3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead

2. Sidewall

3. Shoulder

4. Tread

5. Belt

6. Inner liner

7. Reinforcing rubber

8. Carcass

9. Rim lines

10.Bead wires

11.Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

361

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

This information has been prepared

in accordance with regulations issued

by the National Highway Traffic Safe-

ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides

the purchasers and/or prospective

purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-

formation on uniform tire quality grad-

ing.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer

any questions you may have as you

read this information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger

vehicle tires must conform to Fed-

eral Safety Requirements in addi-

tion to these grades. Quality

grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum sec-

tion width. For example: Treadwear

200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is

a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested un-

der controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear

one and a half (1−1/2) times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, and they represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor trac-

tion performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned

to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and

does not include cornering (turning)

traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

362

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No.109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for

this tire are established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either sep-

arately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

363

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items

are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3

hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile

under that condition

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it

is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—

(a) curb weight;

(b) accessory weight;

(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

364

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Tire related term Meaning

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table

1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing

over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,

not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including

heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special

trim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity or payload)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-

nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

365

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Tire related term Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight

(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,

number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of

occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally

loaded vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

366

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Vehicle load limits include total load

capacity, seating capacity, towing ca-

pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the

load limits shown below.

Total load capacity (payload)

Total load capacity means combined

weight of occupants, cargo and lug-

gage. Tongue load is included when

trailer towing. For the total load ca-

pacity about your vehicle, see “Pay-

load” in Section 8.

Seating capacity:

Standard cab models

Total 3

Access cab and double cab models

Models with bench type front seats:

Total 6 (Front 3, Rear 3)

Models with separate front

seats:

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maxi-

mum number of occupants whose

estimated average weight is 68 kg

(150 lb.) per person. Depending on

the weight of each person, the seat-

ing capacity given may exceed the

total load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants

are within the seating capacity,

do not exceed the total load ca-

pacity.

Towing capacity

Towing capacity means the maximum

gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo weight) that your vehicle is

able to tow. For the towing capacity

about your vehicle, see “Towing ca-

pacity” in Section 8.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or de-

crease depending on the size (weight)

and the number of occupants. For de-

tails, see “Capacity and distribution”

that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than

each load limit. That may cause

not only damage to the tires, but

also deterioration to the steering

ability and braking ability, which

may cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

367

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When stowing cargo and luggage in

the vehicle, observe the following:

DPut cargo and luggage in the rear

deck when at all possible. Be sure

all items are secured in place.

DBe careful to keep the vehicle bal-

anced. Locating the weight as far

forward as possible helps maintain

balance.

DFor better fuel economy, do not

carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

DTo prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during

braking, do not stack anything

behind the front seats higher

than the seatbacks (access and

double cab models). Keep car-

go and luggage low, as close

to the floor as possible.

DNever allow anyone to ride in

the rear deck or luggage

compartment (double cab mod-

els only). It is not designed for

passengers. They should ride

in their seats with their seat

belts properly fastened. Other-

wise, they are much more likely

to suffer serious bodily injury,

in the event of sudden braking

or a collision.

DDo not drive with objects left

on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the

driver’s field of view. Or they

may move during sharp vehicle

acceleration or turning, and im-

pair the driver’s control of the

vehicle. In an accident they

may injure the vehicle occu-

pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-

tal weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) – (Total weight of occupants)

STEPS FOR DETERMINING

CORRECT LOAD LIMIT

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example,

if the “XXX” amount equals 1400

lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

368

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available car-

go and luggage load capacity of

your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, see

“Trailer towing” in Section 3.

Cargo

capacity

Total load

capacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE

In case that 2 people with the com-

bined weight of A kg (lb.) are riding

in your vehicle with the total load ca-

pacity of B kg (lb.), the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows:

B kg (lb.) − A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of D

kg (lb.) get on, the available cargo

and luggage load will be reduced E

kg (lb.) as follows:

C kg (lb.) − D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the

number of occupants increases, the

cargo and luggage load equaling the

combined weight of occupants who

got on later must be reduced. In other

words, if the increase in the number

of occupants causes the excess of

the total load capacity (combined

weight of occupants plus cargo and

luggage load), you have to reduce the

cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity,

see “Vehicle load limits” in this Sec-

tion.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-

pant’s weight and the cargo load

is less than the total load capac-

ity, do not apply the load uneven-

ly. That may cause not only dam-

age to the tire but also deteriora-

tion to the steering ability due to

unbalance of the vehicle, causing

an accident.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

369

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Determine what kind of tires your

vehicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabil-

ity tires best suited to highway driving

under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the

same traction performance as snow

tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow−covered or icy roads.

For driving on snow−covered or icy

roads, we recommend using snow

tires. If installing snow tires, be sure

to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to pro-

vide better traction in snow and to be

adequate for driving in most winter

conditions, as well as for use all year

round.

All season tires, however, do not have

adequate traction performance

compared with snow tires in heavy or

loose snow. Also, all season tires fall

short in acceleration and handling

performance compared with summer

tires in highway driving.

The details about how to distinguish

summer tires from all season tires are

described “—Tire symbols” in Section

CAUTION

DDo not mix summer and all sea-

son tires on your vehicle as

this can cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics, resulting

in loss of control.

DDo not use tires other than the

manufacturer’s designated

tires, and never mix tires or

wheels of the sizes different

from the originals.

Types of tires

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

370

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

371

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Before starting the engine 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving in various conditions 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off−road driving precautions 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter driving tips 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dinghy towing 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 389. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

372

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

seat cushion angle, head restraint

height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”

position and release it, the cranking hold

function continues to crank the engine in

“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine

after about 25 seconds maximum if the

engine has not started yet. When you

crank the engine again, wait a few sec-

onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,

the function will keep cranking for about

30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Manual transmission: Press the clutch

pedal to the floor and shift the trans-

mission into neutral. Hold the clutch

pedal to the floor until the engine is

started. A starter safety device will pre-

vent the starter from operating if the

clutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Automatic transmission: Put the se-

lector lever in “P”. If you need to re-

start the engine while the vehicle is

moving, put the selector lever in “N”.

A starter safety device will prevent the

starter from operating if the selector

lever is in any drive position.

4. Automatic transmission only: De-

press the brake pedal and hold it to

the floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine

How to start the engine—

—Cranking hold function (with

automatic transmission) (a) Before cranking

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

373

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-

low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-

ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system in your

engine automatically controls the proper

air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start

a cold or hot engine as follows:

With manual transmission—With your foot

off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine

by turning the ignition key to “START”

position. Release it when the engine

starts.

With automatic transmission—With your

foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to “START” position, then re-

lease it.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,

not in idle. For warming up, drive with

smoothly turning engine until engine cool-

ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-

dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” in Sec-

tion 4.

NOTICE

zWith manual transmission only—Do

not crank for more than 30 seconds

at a time. This may overheat the

starter and wiring systems.

zDo not race a cold engine.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have the

engine checked immediately.

DAlways slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

DDrive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving

onto high, sharp−edged objects and

other road hazards. Failure to do so

can lead to severe tire damage such

as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps

or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-

wise, the impact could cause severe

damage to the tires and/or wheels.

DWhen parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so

that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the

parking brake, and place the transmis-

sion in “P” (automatic) or in first or

reverse (manual). If necessary, block

the wheels.

(b) Starting the engine

Tips for driving in various

conditions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

374

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DWashing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To

see whether they are wet, check that

there is no traffic near you, and then

press the pedal lightly. If you do not

feel a normal braking force, the brakes

are probably wet. To dry them, drive

the vehicle cautiously while lightly

pressing the brake pedal with the park-

ing brake applied. If they still do not

work safely, pull to the side of the road

and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

DFour−wheel drive models only—Toyota

recommends not using four−wheel drive

on dry hard−surfaced roads, because

four−wheel driving will cause unneces-

sary noise and wear, and poor fuel

economy.

DFour−wheel drive models only—In cold

temperatures, noise may occur when

driving in two−wheel drive before the

transfer is warmed up. Therefore, first

drive in four−wheel drive until the

transfer is warmed up.

CAUTION

DBefore driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released

and the parking brake reminder

light is off.

DDo not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

DDo not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. It can cause

dangerous overheating, needless

wear, and poor fuel economy.

DTo drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.

Remember, if you ride the brakes

excessively, they may overheat and

not work properly.

DBe careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on

a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-

tion or engine braking could cause

the vehicle to skid or spin.

DDo not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit

permits it, do not drive over 140

km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle

has high−speed capability tires.

Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may

result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury. Be sure to con-

sult a tire dealer to determine

whether the tires on your vehicle

are high−speed capability tires or

not before driving at such speeds.

DDo not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are

wet, your vehicle will require a

longer stopping distance, and it

may pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Also, the park-

ing brake will not hold the vehicle

securely.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

375

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

When driving your vehicle off−road, please

observe the following precautions to en-

sure your driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to off−road

vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where

off−road vehicles are permitted to trav-

el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s

permission before entering private prop-

erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.

Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-

strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-

tions are wet, driving techniques should

be changed or travel delayed to pre-

vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and

Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining

to driving your vehicle off−road, consult

the following organizations.

DState and Local Parks and Recreation

Departments

DState Motor Vehicle Bureau

DRecreational Vehicle Clubs

DU.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

DDrive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by

driving in dangerous places.

DDo not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel and

injure your hands. Keep both hands

and especially your thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

DAlways check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

DAfter driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check

that there is no grass, bush, paper,

rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the under-

body. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering

to the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

DIn a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

DWhen driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

Off−road driving precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

376

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

zIf driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the river bed for

firmness. Drive slowly and avoid

deep water.

zTake all necessary safety measures

to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does

not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake

will cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease from

wheel bearings, causing rusting and

premature failure, and may also en-

ter the differentials, transmission

and transfer case, reducing the gear

oil’s lubricating qualities.

zSand and mud that has accumulated

in brake drums and around brake

discs may affect braking efficiency

and may damage brake system com-

ponents.

zAlways perform a maintenance in-

spection after each day of off−road

driving that has taken you through

rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

For scheduled maintenance in-

formation, refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-

tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level” in

Section 7−2 for details of coolant type

selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Winter driving tips

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

377

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Check the condition of the battery and

cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of

any battery, so it must be in top shape

to provide enough power for winter start-

ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually

inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer

and most service stations will be pleased

to check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is

suitable for the cold weather.

See Section 7−2 for recommended viscos-

ity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your

vehicle during winter months may cause

harder starting. If you are not sure about

which oil to use, call your Toyota deal-

er—they will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the

locks to keep them from freezing. To open

a frozen lock, try heating the key before

inserting it.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-

freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota

dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow

the manufacturer’s directions for how

much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when

there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into

“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse

(manual) and block the front wheels. Do

not use the parking brake, or snow or

water accumulated in and around the

parking brake mechanism may freeze,

making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating

under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders

can make steering difficult. During bad

winter driving, stop and check under the

fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,

we recommend you carry some emer-

gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the

vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,

bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,

jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with four wheels on the

ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

378

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a

passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow-

ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on

handling, performance, braking, durability

and driving economy (fuel consumption,

etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend

on the proper use of correct equipment

and cautious driving habits. For your safe-

ty and the safety of others, you must not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your

local Toyota dealer for further details be-

fore towing.

We recommend you use a weight distribut-

ing hitch when towing to keep your ve-

hicle level with the ground.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult your Toyota dealer for further in-

formation on additional requirements

such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-

er weight, gross combination weight,

gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight

and trailer tongue load are all within

the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load

can be measured with platform scales

found at highway weighing stations, build-

ing supply companies, trucking companies,

junk yards, etc.

CAUTION

DThe maximum gross trailer weight

(trailer weight plus cargo weight)

must never exceed the following.

1GR−FE engine

Standard cab models

2358 kg (5200 lb.)

Access cab models

2268 kg (5000 lb.)

2UZ−FE engine

Two−wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

2494 kg (5500 lb.)

With towing package

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

2494 kg (5500 lb.)

With towing package

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

2358 kg (5200 lb.)

With towing package

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

Trailer towing

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

379

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Four−wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

2494 kg (5500 lb.)

With towing package

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

2358 kg (5200 lb.)

With towing package

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

2222 kg (4900 lb.)

With towing package

3039 kg (6700 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is

necessary to use a sway control

device with sufficient capacity. The

combination of the gross trailer

weight added to the total weight of

the vehicle, occupants and vehicle

cargo must never exceed a total of

the following.

1GR−FE engine

4173 kg (9200 lb.)

2UZ−FE engine

Without towing package

4536 kg (10000 lb.)

With towing package

5352 kg (11800 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight of

the trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-

hicle and trailer combination, can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

DTrailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by

the hitch manufacturer. Even though

the vehicle may be physically capa-

ble of towing a higher weight, the

operator must determine the maxi-

mum weight rating of the particular

hitch assembly and never exceed

the maximum weight rating speci-

fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding

the maximum weight rating set by

the trailer hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

380

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DThe gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) indicated on the

Certification Label. The gross ve-

hicle weight is the sum of weights

of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer

tongue load. It also includes the

weight of any special equipment

installed on your vehicle.

DThe load on either the front or rear

axle resulting from distribution of

the gross vehicle weight on both

axles must not exceed the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed

on the Certification Label.

100 =9 to 11%

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight

DThe trailer cargo load should be

distributed so that the tongue load

is 9 to 11% of the total trailer

weight, not exceeding the maximum

load of the following.

Weight carrying hitch or distributing

hitch

1GR−FE engine

Standard cab models

236 kg (520 lb.)

Access cab models

227 kg (500 lb.)

2UZ−FE engine

Two−wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

249 kg (550 lb.)

With towing package

331 kg (730 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

249 kg (550 lb.)

With towing package

331 kg (730 lb.)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

381

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Double cab models

Without towing package

236 kg (520 lb.)

With towing package

318 kg (700 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

249 kg (550 lb.)

With towing package

331 kg (730 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

236 kg (520 lb.)

With towing package

318 kg (700 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

222 kg (490 lb.)

With towing package

304 kg (670 lb.)

However, if towing with a fifth

wheel trailer, the cargo load must

be distributed so that the tongue

load is 19 to 21% of the total trailer

weight. Never load the trailer with

more weight in the back than in the

front. About 60% of the trailer load

should be in the front half of the

trailer and the remaining 40% in the

rear.

HITCHES

DIf you wish to install a trailer hitch, you

should consult with your Toyota dealer.

DUse only a hitch recommended by the

hitch manufacturer and the one which

conforms to the total trailer weight

requirement.

DThe hitch must be bolted securely to

the vehicle frame and installed accord-

ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

DThe hitch ball and king pin should have

a light coat of grease.

DToyota recommends removing the trail-

er hitch whenever you are not towing

a trailer to reduce the possibility of

additional damage caused by the hitch

if your vehicle is struck from behind.

After removing the hitch, seal any

mounting holes in the vehicle body to

prevent entry of pollutants such as ex-

haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

382

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches as

they can cause damage to the axle

housing, wheel bearings, wheels or

tires. Also, never install a hitch which

may interfere with the normal function

of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so

equipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating

2 Ball diameter

3 Shank length

4 Shank diameter

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-

mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-

plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size

for the trailer coupler. Most couplers

are stamped with the required trailer

ball size. The sizes you will most likely

find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to

match or exceed the gross trailer

weight rating of the trailer. The trailer

ball load rating should be printed on

the top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the

threaded ball shank must protrude be-

yond the bottom of the lock washer

and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer

ball shank must be matched to the ball

mount hole diameter size.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

383

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

Vehicles with 2UZ−FE engine (with

towing package)—Only use a ball

mount attachment specified for the

Toyota Tundra.

BUMPER TOWING

The rear bumper of your vehicle is

equipped with a hole to install a trailer

ball. The maximum gross trailer weight is

2268 kg (5000 lb.).

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight

(trailer weight plus cargo weight)

when towing with the bumper must

never exceed 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

FIFTH WHEEL TRAILER

NOTICE

When towing a fifth wheel trailer, be

careful not to hit the cabin or deck

by the trailer while making a sharp

turn.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

384

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1 Coupler

2 Trailer ball

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-

plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer

ball setup on must be the proper height

for the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

DToyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any applica-

ble federal and state/provincial regu-

lations.

DA safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the

trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the

chain for turns. The chain should

cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping to

the ground in case it becomes dam-

aged or separated. For correct safety

chain procedures, follow the hitch or

trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions.

CAUTION

DIf the total trailer weight exceeds

453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are

required.

DNever tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its

braking effectiveness.

DNever tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to

both the trailer and the vehicle. If

damage occurs to the coupling unit

or hitch ball, there is danger of the

trailer wandering over into another

lane.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

385

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING

BRAKE CONTROLLER (with towing

package)

Your vehicle is equipped with a service

connector for the trailer brake controller

as shown. Link the connector to the trailer

brake controller via the sub wire harness

stored in the glove box. The detailed ex-

planation of the sub wire harness circuit

is packed together with the sub wire har-

ness.

Be sure to position the trailer brake con-

troller where it does not prevent the driver

from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-

ness be stored in the glove box when it

is not in use.

TIRES

DEnsure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. See Section 7−2 and

Section 8 for instructions.

DThe trailer tires should be inflated to

the pressure recommended by the trail-

er manufacturer in respect to the total

trailer weight.

4−pin connector

7−pin connector

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

386

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER

LIGHTS

DYour vehicle is equipped with a wire

harness stored in the rear end under

body. Some models are fitted with a

socket for trailer lights under the rear

bumper. Use either of them to connect

and operate the trailer lights. However,

the trailer lights must comply with fed-

eral, state/provincial and local regula-

tions. See your local recreational ve-

hicle dealer or rental agency for the

correct type of wiring and relays for

your trailer. Check for correct operation

of the turn signals and stop lights each

time you hitch up. Direct splicing may

damage your vehicle’s electrical system

and cause a malfunction of your lights.

7−pin connector (with towing pack-

age)—This can be also connected to

the trailer brake and trailer sub battery.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

DToyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a

vehicle with any new power train com-

ponent (engine, transmission, differen-

tial, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first

800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

DIf you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due

to the additional load. For this informa-

tion, please refer to the scheduled

maintenance information in the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

DRetighten all fixing bolts of the towing

ball and bracket after approximately

1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

DCheck that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has

an abnormal nose−up or nose−down

condition, and check for improper

tongue load, overload, worn suspension

or other possible causes.

DMake sure the trailer cargo is securely

loaded so that it cannot shift.

DCheck that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal, state/

provincial or local regulations. If not,

install the rear view mirrors required

for towing purposes.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will

handle differently than when not tow-

ing. The three main causes of vehicle−

trailer accidents are driver error, exces-

sive speed and improper trailer loading.

Keep these in mind when towing:

DBefore starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-

tions. After driving a short distance,

stop and recheck the lights and con-

nections. Before actually towing a trail-

er, practice turning, stopping and back-

ing with a trailer in an area away from

traffic until you learn the feel.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

387

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DBacking with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of

the steering wheel and move your hand

to the left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the right to

move the trailer to the right. (This pro-

cedure is generally opposite to that

when backing without a trailer). Also,

just turn the steering wheel a little at

a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged

turning. Have someone guide you when

backing to reduce the risk of an acci-

dent.

DBecause stopping distance may be in-

creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance

should be increased when towing a

trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of

speed, allow at least one vehicle and

trailer length between you and the ve-

hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as

you may skid, resulting in jackknifing

and loss of control. This is especially

true on wet or slippery surfaces.

DAvoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-

tion. If your vehicle has a manual

transmission, prevent excessive clutch

slippage by keeping engine rpm low

and not racing the engine. Always start

out in first gear.

DAvoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a

tight turn. Slow down before making a

turn to avoid the necessity of sudden

braking.

DRemember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than

the vehicle wheels to the inside of the

turn. Therefore, compensate for this by

making a larger than normal turning

radius with your vehicle.

DCrosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle

and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention

to the rear from time to time to pre-

pare yourself for being passed by large

trucks or buses, which may cause your

vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying

happens, firmly grip the steering wheel

and reduce speed immediately but

gradually. Never increase speed. Steer

straight ahead. If you make no extreme

correction with the steering or brakes,

the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

DBe careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable

distance. After passing a vehicle, do

not forget the length of your trailer and

be sure you have plenty of room be-

fore changing lanes.

DIn order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency, do not use sixth gear (manual

transmission) or overdrive (automatic

transmission).

DBecause of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat

on hot days (at temperatures over

30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or

steep grade with a trailer. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge indicates

overheating, immediately turn off the air

conditioning (if in use), pull off the road

and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” in Section 4.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

388

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DAlways place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when

parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.

Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)

or in first or reverse (manual). Avoid

parking on a slope with a trailer, but

if it cannot be avoided, do so only

after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release your brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or

“P” (automatic) and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on a

slope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position

(automatic) or the clutch pedal de-

pressed (manual), start the engine.

(With an automatic transmission, be

sure to keep the brake pedal de-

pressed.)

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake (also foot

brake on automatic transmission ve-

hicles) and slowly pull or back away

from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply

your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

DDo not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or

the posted towing speed limit,

whichever is lower. Because insta-

bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−

trailer combination usually in-

creases as the speed increases, ex-

ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may

cause loss of control.

DSlow down and downshift before

descending steep or long downhill

grades. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

DAvoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to overheat

and result in reduced braking effi-

ciency.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

389

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take

it easy. It will help make your vehicle last

longer, too. Here are some specific tips

on how to save money on both fuel and

repairs:

DKeep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes

tire wear and wastes fuel. See Section

7−2 for instructions.

DDo not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a

heavier load on the engine, causing

greater fuel consumption.

DAvoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once

the engine is running smoothly, begin

driving—but gently. Remember, howev-

er, that on cold winter days this may

take a little longer.

DAlways keep the automatic transmis-

sion overdrive switch turned on.

Driving with the overdrive switch off

will reduce the fuel economy. (For de-

tails, see “Automatic transmission” in

Section 1−7.)

DAccelerate slowly and smoothly.

Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high

gear as quickly as possible.

DAvoid long engine idling. If you have

a long wait and you are not in traffic,

it is better to turn off the engine and

start again later.

DAvoid engine lugging or over−rev-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for

the road on which you are travelling.

DAvoid continuous speeding up and

slowing down. Stop−and−go driving

wastes fuel.

DAvoid unnecessary stopping and

braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try

to time the traffic signals so you only

need to stop as little as possible or

take advantage of through streets to

avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-

tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-

den braking. This will also reduce wear

on your brakes.

DAvoid heavy traffic or traffic jams

whenever possible.

DDo not rest your foot on the clutch

or brake pedal. This causes premature

wear, overheating and poor fuel econo-

my.

DMaintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater

the fuel consumption. By reducing your

speed, you will cut down on fuel con-

sumption.

DKeep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and

slow down on rough roads. Improper

alignment not only causes faster tire

wear but also puts an extra load on

the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

DKeep the bottom of your vehicle free

from mud, etc. This not only lessens

weight but also helps prevent corro-

sion.

DKeep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner,

improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,

dirty oil and grease, brakes not

adjusted, etc. all lower engine

performance and contribute to poor fuel

economy. For longer life of all parts

and lower operating costs, keep all

maintenance work on schedule, and if

you often drive under severe

conditions, see that your vehicle

receives more frequent maintenance.

(For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, please refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.)

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

390

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and

brake booster will not function with-

out the engine running. Also, the

emission control system operates

properly only when the engine is run-

ning.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

391

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your vehicle will not start 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot increase engine speed 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle becomes stuck 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 416. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

392

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Before making these checks, make sure

you have followed the correct starting pro-

cedure given in “How to start the engine”

in Section 3 and that you have sufficient

fuel.

If the engine is not turning over or is

turning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals are

tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch

on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out

when the starter is cranked, the battery

is discharged. You may try jump start-

ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for further

instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will

not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-

hicle. Your vehicle may suddenly

move when the engine starts, and

may damage itself or cause a colli-

sion. Also the three−way catalytic

converter may overheat and become a

fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal

speed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or

“LOCK” and try starting the engine

again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded

engine” for further instructions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota

dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking.

With manual transmission—

If this happens, turn the ignition key to

“START” with the accelerator pedal fully

depressed. Keep the key and accelerator

pedal in these positions for 15 seconds

and release them. Then try starting the

engine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-

conds of cranking, release the key, wait

a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-

conds at a time. This may overheat

the starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

393

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

With automatic transmission—

If this happens, turn the ignition key to

“START” with the accelerator pedal fully

depressed, and hold the key at this posi-

tion for about 30 seconds. Then the

cranking hold function stops cranking au-

tomatically, and you can try starting the

engine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a few

minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

To avoid serious personal injury and

damage to your vehicle which might re-

sult from battery explosion, acid burns,

electrical burns, or damaged electronic

components, these instructions must be

followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this

procedure, we strongly recommend that

you seek the help of a competent me-

chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

DBatteries contain sulfuric acid

which is poisonous and corrosive.

Wear protective safety glasses when

jump starting, and avoid spilling

acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-

hicle.

DIf you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove

any contaminated clothing and flush

the affected area with water imme-

diately. Then get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue to

apply water with a sponge or cloth

while en route to the medical office.

DThe gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or

spark is brought near. Use only

standardized jumper cables and do

not smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must

be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you

are sure that the booster battery is

correct.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

394

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the vehicles

are not touching. Turn off all unneces-

sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery of

matching or higher quality. Any other

battery may be difficult to jump start

with.

If jump starting is difficult, charge the

battery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs

from the booster and discharged batter-

ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents

on the batteries. (This helps reduce the

explosion hazard, personal injuries and

burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the

booster battery is not running, start it

and let it run for a few minutes. During

jump starting, run the engine at about

2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

Discharged battery

Booster

battery

Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

Jumper

cable

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-

der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the positive (red) jumper cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the booster

battery.

Jumper cable

Negative terminal

(“−” mark)

Booster

battery

Discharged battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative

(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)

terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the negative (black) jumper cable to

a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic

point of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

The recommended connecting points

are shown in the following illustrations:

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

395

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Connecting point for 1GR−FE engine

Connecting point for 2UZ−FE engine

Do not connect the cable to or near

any part that moves when the engine

is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over

the battery or accidentally let the

jumper cables or clamps touch any-

thing except the correct battery termi-

nals or the ground.

5. With automatic transmission—Charge

the discharged battery with the jumper

cables connected for approximately 5

minutes. At this time, run the engine in

the vehicle with the booster battery at

about 2000 rpm with the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.

After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm

for several minutes with the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the

exact reverse order: the negative cable

and then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover

cloths—they may now contain sulfuric

acid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery vent

plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent (for example, lights left on),

you should have it checked at your Toyota

dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-

ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper

cables are tight. Recharge the discharged

battery with the jumper cables connected

for several minutes and restart your en-

gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,

the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-

ecked at your Toyota dealer.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

396

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or

“LOCK”, and try starting the engine

again.

If the engine will not start, see “If your

vehicle will not start”.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work, so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

If your engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-

perience a loss of power, or if you hear

a loud knocking or pinging noise, the

engine has probably overheated. You

should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergency

flashers. Put the transmission in “P”

(automatic) or neutral (manual) and ap-

ply the parking brake. Turn off the air

conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.

Wait until the steam subsides before

opening the hood. If there is no coolant

boiling over or steam, leave the engine

running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep

the hood closed until there is no

steam. Escaping steam or coolant is

a sign of very high pressure.

If your engine stalls while

driving

If you cannot increase engine

speed If your vehicle overheats

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

397

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. Visually check to see if the engine

drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.

Look for obvious coolant leaks from the

radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.

However, note that water draining from

the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands and clothing away from the

moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the

coolant is leaking, stop the engine im-

mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-

sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and

there are no obvious leaks, you may

help the engine cool down more quickly

by running it at about 1500 rpm for a

few minutes with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,

add coolant to the reservoir while the

engine is running. Fill it about half full.

For the coolant type, see “Coolant type

selection” in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator

cap when the engine and radiator are

hot. Serious injury could result from

scalding hot fluid and steam blown

out under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperature

has cooled to normal, again check the

coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-

sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-

ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the

system. You should have it checked as

soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place

well away from the traffic. Avoid

stopping on the center divider of

a highway. Park on a level spot

with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your

emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and

put the transmission in “P” (auto-

matic) or reverse (manual).

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-

hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions

thoroughly.

If you have a flat tire—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

398

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe

the following to reduce the possi-

bility of personal injury:

DFollow jacking instructions.

DDo not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-

ported by the jack. Otherwise,

personal injury may occur.

DDo not start or run the engine

while your vehicle is supported

by the jack.

DStop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking

brake and put the transmission

in “P” (automatic) or reverse

(manual). Block the wheel diag-

onally opposite to the one be-

ing changed if necessary.

DMake sure to set the jack prop-

erly in the jack point. Raising

the vehicle with jack improper-

ly positioned will damage the

vehicle or may allow the ve-

hicle to fall off the jack and

cause personal injury.

DNever get under the vehicle

when the vehicle is supported

by the jack alone.

DUse the jack only for lifting

your vehicle during wheel

changing.

DDo not raise the vehicle with

someone in the vehicle.

DWhen raising the vehicle, do

not place any objects on top

of or underneath the jack.

DRaise the vehicle only high

enough to remove and change

the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a

deflated tire. Driving even a

short distance can damage a

tire and wheel beyond repair.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

399

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Get the required tools and

spare tire.

1 Jack handle

2 Wheel nut wrench

3Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency,

you should familiarize yourself with

the use of the jack, each of the tools

and their storage locations.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction

1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2

until the jack is firmly secured to pre-

vent it flying forward during a collision

or sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Insert the end of the jack handle

into the lowering screw and turn

it counterclockwise.

2. After the tire is lowered completely

to the ground, remove the holding

bracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it in

place with the outer side of the wheel

facing up. Then secure the tire, taking

care that the tire goes straight up

without catching on any other part, to

prevent it from flying forward during

a collision or sudden braking.

—Required tools and spare tire

(standard cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

400

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Front

Access cab models

Front

Double cab models

1. Get the required tools and

spare tire.

1 Tool bag

2Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency,

you should familiarize yourself with

the use of the jack, each of the tools

and their storage locations.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction

1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2

until the jack is firmly secured to pre-

vent it flying forward during a collision

or sudden braking.

—Required tools and spare tire

(access and double cab

models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

401

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To remove the spare tire:

1. Put a jack handle, jack handle ex-

tension and jack handle end to-

gether as shown in the illustration.

1 Jack handle end

2 Jack handle extension

3 Jack handle

CAUTION

Make sure they are securely fixed

with the screw.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle

extension into the lowering screw

and turn it counterclockwise with

the handle.

3. After the tire is lowered completely

to the ground, remove the holding

bracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it in

place with the outer side of the wheel

facing up. Then secure the tire, taking

care that the tire goes straight up

without catching on any other part, to

prevent it from flying forward during

a collision or sudden braking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-

posite the flat tire to keep the

vehicle from rolling when it is

jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a

wheel block in front of one of the front

wheels or behind one of the rear

wheels.

—Blocking the wheel

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

402

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

Type E

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the

beveled end of the wheel nut wrench

as shown.

Type B only—To protect the wheel

surface, place sufficient paper or cloth

between the wheel and wrench.

—Removing wheel ornament

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

403

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-

ment by hand. Take due care in

handling the ornament to avoid

unexpected personal injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before

raising the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise

to loosen. To get maximum leverage,

fit the wrench to the nut so that the

handle is on the right side, as shown

above. Grab the wrench near the end

of the handle and pull up on the han-

dle. Be careful that the wrench does

not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-

screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose

and the wheels may fall off,

which could cause a serious ac-

cident.

—Loosening wheel nuts

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

404

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct

jack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on

a level and solid place.

JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side rail

Rear—Under the rear axle housing

Access and double cab models—Put

a jack handle, jack handle extension

and jack handle end together as

shown in the illustration.

1 Jack handle end

2 Jack handle extension

3 Jack handle

CAUTION

Make sure they are each securely

fixed with screws.

Standard cab models

Access and double cab models

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

405

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

6. After making sure that no one

is in the vehicle, raise it high

enough so that the spare tire

can be installed.

Remember you will need more ground

clearance when putting on the spare

tire than when removing the flat tire.

Standard cab models—To raise the

vehicle, insert the jack handle into the

jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clock-

wise. As the jack touches the vehicle

and begins to lift, double−check that

it is properly positioned.

Access cab and double cab models—

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack

handle extension into the jack (it is

a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with

the handle, making sure the handle

remains firmly fitted onto the jack

handle extension. As the jack touches

the vehicle and begins to lift, double−

check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the

jack alone.

7. Remove the wheel nuts and

change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it

aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and

align the holes in the wheel with the

bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get

at least the top bolt started through

its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it

back over the other bolts.

—Changing wheels

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

406

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Before putting on wheels, remove any

corrosion on the mounting surfaces

with a wire brush or such. Installation

of wheels without good metal−to−met-

al contact at the mounting surface can

cause wheel nuts to loosen and

eventually cause a wheel to come off

while driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-

ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end

inward) and tighten them as much as

you can by hand. Press back on the

tire back and see if you can tighten

them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead

to overtightening the nuts and

damaging the bolts. The nuts

may loose and the wheels may

fall off, which could cause a seri-

ous accident. If there is oil or

grease on any bolt or nut, clean

it.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

407

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

9. Lower the vehicle completely

and tighten the wheel nuts.

Standard cab models—Turn the jack

handle counterclockwise to lower the

vehicle.

Access cab and double cab models—

Turn the jack handle extension coun-

terclockwise with handle to lower the

vehicle, making sure the handle re-

mains firmly fitted onto the jack han-

dle extension.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and

turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.

Do not use other tools or any addition-

al leverage other than your hands,

such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.

Make sure the wrench is securely en-

gaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in

the order shown. Repeat the process

until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

DWhen lowering the vehicle,

make sure all portions of your

body and all other persons

around will not be injured as

the vehicle is lowered to the

ground.

DHave the wheel nuts tightened

with torque wrench to 110 N·m

(11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon

as possible after changing

wheels. Otherwise, the nuts

may loosen and the wheels

may fall off, which could cause

a serious accident.

Type A

Type B

—Lowering your vehicle —Reinstalling wheel ornament

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

408

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Type C

Type D

Type E

10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.

1. Put the wheel ornament in posi-

tion.

Type A—Align the cutout of the wheel

ornament with the valve stem as

shown.

2. Then firmly tap the outer edge of

the wheel cap with the side or heel

of your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-

nament to avoid unexpected per-

sonal injury.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

409

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

11.Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-

cation designated in Section 8. If the

pressure is lower, drive slowly to the

nearest service station and fill to the

correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-

tion valve cap as dirt and moisture

could get into the valve core and

possibly cause air leakage. If the cap

is missing, have a new one put on as

soon as possible.

12.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.

With a spare tire of the same wheel

type as the installed tires—

As soon after changing wheels as

possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the

torque specified in Section 8 with a

torque wrench. Have a technician re-

pair the flat tire.

With a spare tire of different wheel

type from the installed tires—

As soon after changing wheels as

possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the

torque specified in Section 8 with a

torque wrench. Have a technician re-

pair the flat tire and replace the spare

tire with it.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the

tools, jack and flat tire are se-

curely in place in their storage

location to reduce the possibility

of personal injury during a colli-

sion or sudden braking.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-

sure warning system is necessary

after you have rotated your tires.

See “Tire pressure warning sys-

tem” in Section 1−7.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt

to rock the vehicle free by moving it

forward and backward.

If your vehicle is equipped with the

“AUTO LSD” system, you can use it in

this situation. (For details, see “AUTO

LSD system” in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle

free by moving it forward and back-

ward if people or objects are any-

where near the vehicle. During the

rocking operation the vehicle may

suddenly move forward or backward

as it becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or ob-

jects.

—After changing wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

410

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the

following precautions to prevent dam-

age to the transmission and other

parts.

zDo not depress the accelerator ped-

al while shifting the selector lever

or before the transmission is com-

pletely shifted to forward or reverse

gear.

zDo not race the engine and avoid

spinning the wheels.

zIf your vehicle remains stuck after

rocking the vehicle several times,

consider other ways such as tow-

ing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

(b) Using flat bed truck

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

Four−wheel drive models

If your vehicle needs to be

towed—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

411

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you have it done by your Toyota dealer

or a commercial tow truck service. In

consultation with them, have your ve-

hicle towed using either (a) or (b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing

service from a Toyota dealer or com-

mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-

hicle carefully in accordance with the

instructions given in “—Emergency tow-

ing” in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that

your vehicle is not damaged while being

towed. Commercial operators are generally

aware of the state/provincial and local

laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is

towed incorrectly. Although most operators

know the correct procedure, it is possible

to make a mistake. To avoid damage to

your vehicle, make sure the following pre-

cautions are observed. If necessary, show

this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,

and abide by the state/provincial and local

laws. The wheels and axle on the ground

must be in good condition. If they are

damaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—

DManual transmission:

We recommend using a towing dolly under

the rear wheels. If you do not use a tow-

ing dolly, release the parking brake and

put the transmission in neutral.

DAutomatic transmission:

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatic

transmission from the front with the

rear wheels on the ground, as this

may cause serious damage to the

transmission.

From rear—Place the ignition key in the

“ACC” position.

NOTICE

zWhen lifting wheels, take care to

ensure adequate ground clearance

for towing at the opposite end of

the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the

bumper and/or underbody of the

towed vehicle will be damaged dur-

ing towing.

zDo not tow with the key removed or

in the “LOCK” position, as the

steering lock mechanism is not

strong enough to hold the front

wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

412

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Four−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Use a towing dolly under the

rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front

with the rear wheels on the ground,

as this may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

From rear—We recommend using a tow-

ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do

not use a towing dolly, place the ignition

key in the “ACC” position, put the trans-

mission in neutral and set the transfer in

“2WD” mode.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed or

in the “LOCK” position when towing

from the rear without a towing dolly.

The steering lock mechanism is not

strong enough to hold the front

wheels straight.

(b) Using flat bed truck

type truck

All models—

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-

ther from the front or rear. This may

cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-

rarily towed by a cable or chain se-

cured to one of the emergency towing

eyelets under the front of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;

otherwise your vehicle may be dam-

aged.

—Emergency towing

(two−wheel drive models

without off−road package)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

413

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, drive train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or errat-

ic driving maneuvers which would

place excessive stress on the emer-

gency towing eyelet and towing cable

or chain. The eyelet and towing cable

or chain may break and cause serious

injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically

intended for use in towing vehicles.

Securely fasten the cable or chain to

the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake

and put the transmission in neutral (manu-

al) or “N” (automatic). The key must be

in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-

ning).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-

rarily towed by a cable or chain se-

cured to the emergency towing hook

under the front of the vehicle. Use ex-

treme caution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing hook;

otherwise your vehicle may be dam-

aged.

—Emergency towing (four−wheel

drive models and two−wheel drive

models with off−road package)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

414

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, drive train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or errat-

ic driving maneuvers which would

place excessive stress on the emer-

gency towing hook and towing cable

or chain. The hook and towing cable

or chain may break and cause serious

injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically

intended for use in towing vehicles.

Securely fasten the cable or chain to

the towing hook provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake,

put the transmission in neutral (manual) or

“N” (automatic) and set the transfer in

“2WD” mode. The key must be in “ACC”

(engine off) or “ON” (engine running).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

DBefore emergency towing, check that

the hook is not broken or damaged and

that the installation bolts are not loose.

DFasten the towing cable or chain se-

curely to the hook.

DDo not jerk the hook. Apply steady and

even force.

DTo avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical

angle. Always pull straight ahead.

—Emergency towing hook

precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

415

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

If the emergency towing hook is used

to get out when your vehicle becomes

stuck in the mud, sand or other

condition from which the vehicle can-

not be driven out under its own pow-

er, make sure to observe the precau-

tions mentioned below. Otherwise, ex-

cessive stress will be put on the

hook and the towing cable or chain

may break, causing serious injury or

damage.

DIf the towing vehicle can hardly

move, do not forcibly continue the

towing. Contact your Toyota dealer

or a commercial tow truck service

for assistance.

DTow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

DKeep away from the vehicle during

towing.

The following methods are effective to

use when your vehicle is stuck in the

mud, sand or other condition from

which the vehicle cannot be driven out

under its own power. Use extreme cau-

tion when towing the vehicle. In addi-

tion, keep away from the vehicles and

towing cable or chain when towing.

DRemove the sand and soil in the front

and the back of the tires.

DPlace stones or wood under the tires.

You can purchase a new key at your

Toyota dealer if you can give them the

key number.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” in

Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and

you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota

dealers can still open the door for you,

using their special tools. If you must

break a window to get in, we suggest

breaking the smallest side window be-

cause it is the least expensive to replace.

Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from

the glass.

—Tips for towing a stuck

vehicle If you lose your keys

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

416

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

You can purchase a new wireless re-

mote control transmitter at your Toyota

dealer.

Have the registered identification numbers

of your transmitters deleted from your ve-

hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to avoid the possibility of theft or

an accident. Then, have the identification

number of your new transmitter registered.

At the same time, you must bring all of

the remaining transmitters to have them

registered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote control

system with the new transmitter. Contact

your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your wireless

remote control transmitter

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

417

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CORROSION PREVENTION AND

APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interior 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

418

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-

sign and use of the most advanced

technology available, helps prevent corro-

sion and provides you with the finest qual-

ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to

you. Proper care of your Toyota can help

ensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion

to your vehicle are:

DThe accumulation of road salt, dirt and

moisture in hard−to−reach areas under

the vehicle.

DChipping of paint, or undercoating

caused by minor accidents or by

stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live

in particular areas or operate your ve-

hicle under certain environmental condi-

tions:

DRoad salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-

ence of salt in the air near the sea−

coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

DHigh humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above the freezing point.

DWetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period

of time, may cause corrosion even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

DHigh ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the

vehicle which do not dry quickly due to

lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep

your vehicle, particularly the underside, as

clean as possible and to repair any dam-

age to paint or protective coatings as

soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your

Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of

course, necessary to keep your vehicle

clean by regular washing, but to prevent

corrosion, the following points should be

observed:

DIf you drive on salted roads in the

winter or if you live near the ocean,

you should hose off the undercarriage

at least once a month to minimize cor-

rosion.

DHigh pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside

and wheel housings. Pay particular

attention to these areas as it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to simply wet the

mud and debris without removing. The

lower edge of doors, rocker panels and

frame members have drain holes which

should not be allowed to clog with dirt

as trapped water in these areas can

cause corrosion.

DWash the underside of the vehicle thor-

oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” for

more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’s

paint and trim. If you find any chips or

scratches in the paint, touch them up im-

mediately to prevent corrosion from start-

ing. If the chips or scratches have gone

through the bare metal, have a qualified

body shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

419

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-

ter and dirt can accumulate under the

floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry. Be particularly care-

ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-

ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be

transported in proper containers. If a spill

or leak should occur, immediately clean

and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you

drive on salted or gravel roads, mud

shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size

shields, which come as near to the ground

as possible, are the best. We recommend

that the fittings and the area where the

shields are installed be treated to resist

corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be

happy to assist in supplying and installing

the shields if they are recommended for

your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated

garage or a roofed place. Do not park

your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-

lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in

the garage, or if you drive it covered with

water or snow, your garage may be so

damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your

garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-

rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular

washing.

The following cases may cause weakness

to the paint or corrosion to the body and

parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-

sible.

DWhen driving in a coastal area

DWhen driving on a road sprinkled with

antifreeze

DWhen exposed to coal tar, tree sap,

bird droppings and carcass of an insect

DWhen driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or

chemical substances

DWhen the vehicle becomes remarkably

dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the

vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,

be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-

move any mud or road salt from the

underside of the vehicle or in the

wheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,

mixed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and

keep it wet by dipping it frequently into

the wash water. Do not rub hard—let

the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−

pressure car wash, for example) at or

near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler

door opened. If the water enters the air

vent, you may experience trouble with re-

fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic

wheel ornaments are damaged easily by

organic substances. If any organic sub-

stances splashes an ornament, be sure to

wash it off with water and check if the

ornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damaged

plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off

the wheel and cause accidents while

the vehicle is moving.

Washing and waxing your

Toyota

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

420

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap

or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not

scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper

faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or

cleaners that are marked safe for painted

surfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-

line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-

vents), which may be toxic or cause

damage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can

cause streaking. In hot weather you

may need to rinse each section right

after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle

using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not

rub or press hard—you might scratch

the paint.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended

to maintain the original beauty of your

Toyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle

surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore you begin waxing, even if you are

using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If

the finish has become extremely weath-

ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-

lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions. Be sure to polish and wax

the chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water

does not bead but remains on the sur-

face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers if

your vehicle is re−painted and placed

in a high heat paint waxing booth.

High temperatures could damage the

bumpers.

CAUTION

DVehicles with side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or

spill liquid on the floor. This may

prevent the side airbags and curtain

shield airbags from activating cor-

rectly, resulting in serious injury.

DDo not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto

the floor when cleaning the vehicle

interior or exterior. Water may get

into audio components or other

electrical components above or un-

der the floor carpet (or mat) and

cause a malfunction; and it may

cause body corrosion.

Cleaning the interior

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

421

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily

cleaned with a mild soap or detergent

and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-

move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or

soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the

vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few

minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt

and wipe off the soap with a clean damp

cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-

peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−

type vinyl cleaners are also available

which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline

or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo to

clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove

as much dirt as possible. Several types of

foam cleaners are available; some are in

aerosol cans and others are powders or

liquids which you mix with water to pro-

duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,

use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.

Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible. Read the shampoo instructions

and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with

mild soap and water or with lukewarm

water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-

ing, check the belts for excessive wear,

fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

zDo not use dye or bleach on the

belts—it may weaken them.

zDo not use the belts until they be-

come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any

household window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

Air conditioning control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, console panel,

and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-

warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

zDo not use organic substances (sol-

vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discol-

oring, staining or peeling of the

surface.

zIf you use cleaners or polishing

agents, make sure their ingredients

do not include the substances men-

tioned above.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

422

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

zIf you use a liquid car freshener, do

not spill the liquid onto the ve-

hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-

tain the ingredients mentioned

above. Immediately clean any spill

using the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned

with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened

with 5% solution of neutral detergent for

wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces

of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the

leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean

cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-

lated shaded area.

NOTICE

zIf a stain should fail to come out

with a neutral detergent, apply a

cleaner that does not contain an

organic solvent.

zNever use organic substances such

as benzine, alcohol or gasoline or

alkaline or acid solutions for clean-

ing the leather as these could

cause discoloring.

zUse of a nylon brush or synthetic

fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the

fine grained surface of the leather.

zMildew may develop on soiled leath-

er upholstery. Be especially careful

to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your

upholstery always clean.

zLong exposure to direct sunlight

may cause the leather surface to

harden and shrink. Keep your ve-

hicle in a shaded area, especially in

the summer.

zThe interior of your vehicle is apt

to heat up on hot summer days, so

avoid placing on the upholstery

items made of vinyl or plastic or

containing wax as these tend to

stick to leather when warm.

zImproper cleaning of the leather up-

holstery could result in discolor-

ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the

cleaning of your Toyota, your local

Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer

them.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

423

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Vehicle maintenance and care

Maintenance requirements 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Does your vehicle need repairing? 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 428. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-

nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

424

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for

fewer maintenance requirements with long-

er service intervals to save both your time

and money. However, each regular mainte-

nance, as well as day−to−day care, is

more important than ever before to ensure

smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical

drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure the specified maintenance, including

general maintenance service, is performed.

Note that both the new vehicle and emis-

sion control system warranties specify that

proper maintenance and care must be per-

formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−

to−day care practices that are important to

your vehicle for proper operation. It is the

owner’s responsibility to ensure that the

general maintenance items are performed

regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done

either by yourself or a qualified technician,

or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be

pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those

required to be serviced at regular inter-

vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacement

parts used for maintenance or for the

repair of the emission control system

be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyota

supplied parts for replacement pur-

poses without invalidating the emission

control system warranty. However, use

of replacement parts which are not of

equivalent quality may impair the effec-

tiveness of the emission control sys-

tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-

nance, replacement, or repair of the

emission control devices and system

performed by any automotive repair es-

tablishment or individual without invali-

dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-

ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement” for complete war-

ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through technical

bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership

training programs. They learn to work on

Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,

rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota

dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-

nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that

all required maintenance has been per-

formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-

lems should arise with your vehicle while

under warranty, your Toyota dealer will

promptly take care of it. Again, be sure

to keep a copy of the repair order for any

service performed on your Toyota.

Maintenance requirements

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

425

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy

to do yourself if you have a little mechani-

cal ability and a few basic automotive

tools. Simple instructions for how to per-

form them are presented in Section 7.

If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-

ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-

mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-

self maintenance can affect your warranty

coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance

items that should be performed as fre-

quently as specified. In addition to check-

ing the items listed, if you notice any

unusual noise, smell or vibration, you

should investigate the cause or take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-

fied service shop immediately. It is recom-

mended that any problem you notice be

brought to the attention of your dealer or

the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-

quate ventilation if you run the en-

gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked

from time to time, e.g. each time when

refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the

tank. See Section 7−3 for additional in-

formation.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between

the “F” and “L” lines on the see−through

reservoir when the engine is cold. See

Section 7−2 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and

condenser are clean and not blocked with

leaves, dirt, or insects. See Section 7−2

for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-

tor color. See Section 7−3 for additional

information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.

See Section 7−2 for additional information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the

engine turned off and the vehicle parked

on a level spot. See Section 7−2 for addi-

tional information.

General maintenance

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

426

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. The

level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”

range depending on the fluid temperature.

See Section 7−2 for additional information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of

the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have

the cause located and corrected immedi-

ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” in

Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked

regularly, e.g. while performing periodic

services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights

are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Be alert for changes in steering condition,

such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all seat controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate

smoothly and that all latches lock securely

in any position. Check that the head re-

straints move up and down smoothly and

that the locks hold securely in any latched

position. For folding−down seatback, check

that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as

buckles, retractors and anchors operate

properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt

webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-

aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

uneven pedal effort or catching.

Clutch pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

that the pedal has the proper clearance.

Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes do

not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake (pedal type)

Check that the pedal has the proper travel

and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle

is held securely with only the parking

brake applied.

Parking brake (lever type)

Check that the lever has the proper travel

and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle

is held securely with only the parking

brake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-

nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle

is held securely with the selector lever in

“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed

from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-

ter or other fluid after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. If you smell fuel

fumes or notice any leak, have the cause

found and corrected immediately.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

427

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including tailgate op-

erate smoothly and all latches lock se-

curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-

ondary latch secures the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge ev-

ery two weeks, or at least once a

month. See Section 7−2 for additional

information.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts,

damage or excessive wear. See Sec-

tion 7−2 for additional information.

When checking the tires, make sure

no nuts are missing, and check the

nuts for looseness. Tighten them if

necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the

maintenance schedule. (For sched-

uled maintenance information, please

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.) See Section 7−2 for additional

information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-

mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that

indicate service is needed. Some impor-

tant clues are as follows:

DEngine missing, stumbling, or pinging

DAppreciable loss of power

DStrange engine noises

DA leak under the vehicle (however, wa-

ter dripping from the air conditioning

after use is normal.)

DChange in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide

leak. Drive with the windows open and

have the exhaust system checked im-

mediately.)

DFlat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal

when cornering; uneven tire wear

DVehicle pulls to one side when driving

straight on a level road

DStrange noises related to suspension

movement

DLoss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal al-

most touches floor; vehicle pulls to one

side when braking

DEngine coolant temperature continually

higher than normal

DEngine continually runs hot; oil pres-

sure gauge stays low

If you notice any of these clues, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. It probably needs adjustment or

repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-

hicle unchecked. It could result in se-

rious vehicle damage and possibly

personal injury.

Does your vehicle need

repairing?

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

428

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Some states have vehicle emission in-

spection programs which include OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation

of the emission control system. When the

OBD system determines that a problem

exists somewhere in the emission control

system, the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on. In this case, your vehicle may

not pass the I/M test and need to be

repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to

service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp

does not come on, your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test as readiness codes

have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set

during ordinary driving. However, when the

battery is disconnected or run down, the

codes are erased. Also, depending on

your driving habits, the codes may not be

completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had

come on recently due to temporary mal-

function such as a loose fuel tank cap,

your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips, but the

error code in the OBD system will not be

cleared unless about 40 trips or more are

taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

even the malfunction indicator lamp does

not come on, contact your Toyota dealer

to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

429

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Engine compartment overview 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse locations 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do−it−yourself service precautions 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts and tools 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

430

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil level dipstick

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse block

6. Battery

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Radiator

9. Condenser

10. Windshield washer fluid tank

Engine compartment overview

"1GR−FE engine

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

431

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil level dipstick

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse blocks

6. Battery

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Radiator

9. Condenser

10. Windshield washer fluid tank

"2UZ−FE engine

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

432

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Standard and access cab models Double cab models

Spare fuses

Fuse locations

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

433

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Spare fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,

be sure to follow the correct procedure

given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-

complete servicing may result in operating

problems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenance

during the warranty period may affect your

warranty coverage. Read the separate

Toyota Warranty statement for details and

suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for

those items that are relatively easy for an

owner to perform. As explained in Section

6, there are still a number of items that

must be done by a qualified technician

with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−

it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and

tools”.

Utmost care should be taken when work-

ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental

injury. Here are a few precautions that

you should be especially careful to ob-

serve:

Do−it−yourself service

precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

434

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

DWhen the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away

from the moving fan and engine

drive belts. (Removing rings,

watches, and ties is advisable.)

DRight after driving, the engine

compartment—the engine, radiator,

exhaust manifold, power steering

fluid reservoir and spark plug

boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-

ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids

and spark plugs may also be hot.

DIf the engine is hot, do not remove

the radiator cap or loosen the drain

plugs to prevent burning yourself.

DDo not leave anything that may

burn easily, such as paper or rags,

in the engine compartment.

DDo not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the

battery. Their fumes are flammable.

DDo not get under your vehicle with

just the body jack supporting it. Al-

ways use automotive jack stands or

other solid supports.

DUse eye protection whenever you

work on or under your vehicle

where you may be exposed to flying

or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

DUsed engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as in-

flammation or skin cancer, so care

should be taken to avoid prolonged

and repeated contact with it. To re-

move used engine oil from your

skin, wash thoroughly with soap

and water.

DDo not leave used oil within the

reach of children.

DDispose of used oil and filter only

in a safe and acceptable manner.

Do not dispose of used oil and fil-

ter in household trash, in sewers or

onto the ground. Call your dealer or

a service station for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

DBe extremely cautious when work-

ing on the battery. It contains poi-

sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

zRemember that battery and ignition

cables carry high currents or volt-

ages. Be careful of accidentally

causing a short circuit.

zAdd only “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality eth-

ylene glycol based non−silicate,

non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-

rate coolant with long−life hybrid

organic acid technology to fill the

radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-

ant and 50% deionized water (for

the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%

deionized water (for Canada).

zIf you spill some of the coolant, be

sure to wash it off with water to

prevent it from damaging the parts

or paint.

zDo not allow dirt or anything else

to fall through the spark plug holes.

zDo not pry the outer electrode of a

spark plug against the center elec-

trode.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

435

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

zUse only spark plugs of the speci-

fied type. Using other types will

cause engine damage, loss of per-

formance or radio noise.

zDo not reuse iridium−tipped spark

plugs by cleaning or regapping.

zDo not overfill automatic transmis-

sion fluid, or the transmission

could be damaged.

zDo not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed, or excessive engine

wear could result. Also backfiring

could cause a fire in the engine

compartment.

zBe careful not to scratch the glass

surface with the wiper frame.

zWhen closing the engine hood,

check to see that you have not for-

gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will

need to perform do−it−yourself mainte-

nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-

signed in metric sizes, so your tools must

be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

D“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent

See Section 7−2 for details about en-

gine oil selection.

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

D“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-

trite, and non−borate coolant with long−

life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a

mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-

ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%

coolant and 45% deionized water (for

Canada).

Tools:

DFunnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

DSAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

DAutomatic transmission fluid

DEXRONrII or III

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

DWarm water

DBaking soda

DGrease

DConventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

Parts and tools

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

436

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

DFuse with same amperage rating as

original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

DWater

DWasher fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

Tools:

DFunnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

DBulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in “Re-

placing light bulbs” in Section 7−3.)

Tools:

DScrewdriver

DWrench

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

437

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine and Chassis

Checking the engine oil level 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the engine coolant level 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the radiator and condenser 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking brake fluid 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking power steering fluid 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking tire inflation pressure 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing tires 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotating tires 449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing snow tires and chains 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing wheels 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aluminum wheel precautions 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

438

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

1GR−FE engine

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

2UZ−FE engine

With the engine at operating tempera-

ture and turned off, check the oil level

on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle

should be on level ground. After turning

off the engine, wait a few minutes for

the oil to drain back into the bottom of

the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under

the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far

as it will go, or the reading will not be

correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil

level while holding a rag under the

end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil on

the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly

above the low level, add engine oil of

the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine

oil in small quantities at a time, checking

the dipstick. We recommend that you use

a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to

raise the level between low and full on the

dipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correct

range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):

1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

zBe careful not to spill engine oil on

the vehicle components.

zAvoid overfilling, or the engine

could be damaged.

zCheck the oil level on the dipstick

once again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

439

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good

fuel economy and good starting in cold

weather.

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE

10W−30 may be used. However, it

should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at

the next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

440

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks are

added to some oil containers to help

you select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-

where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oil

quality by API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) designations such as SL. The center

portion of the label shows the SAE viscos-

ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−

Conserving” shown in the lower portion,

indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-

pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-

dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-

fication Mark is displayed on the front of

the container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-

mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” is available, which has been

specifically tested and approved for all

Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-

voir when the engine is cold. The cool-

ant level is satisfactory if it is between

the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.

If the level is low, add the coolant. (For

the coolant type, see “Coolant type

selection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary

with engine temperature. However, if the

level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

If the coolant level drops within a short

time after replenishing, there may be a

leak in the system. Visually check the

radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain

cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota

dealer test the cap pressure and check

for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the radiator cap when the en-

gine is hot.

Checking the engine coolant

level

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

441

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage

your engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For the Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant”, which has been tested to

ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor

result in malfunction of your engine

coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota

Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology and has been specifically

designed to avoid engine cooling system

malfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

If any of the above parts are extremely

dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-

ful not to touch the radiator or con-

denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator

and condenser, do not perform the

work by yourself.

Checking the radiator and

condenser

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

442

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To check the fluid level, simply look at

the see−through reservoir. The level

should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear. So

be sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it

may indicate a serious mechanical prob-

lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the

brake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap by

hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted

line. This brings the fluid to the correct

level when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once

opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air, and excess moisture can cause a

dangerous loss of braking.

When the brake fluid must be replaced,

contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir

because brake fluid can harm your

hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your

hands or in your eyes, flush the af-

fected area with clean water immedi-

ately. If you still feel uncomfortable

with your hands or eyes, go to the

doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash

it off with water to prevent it from

damaging the parts or paint.

Checking brake fluid

(without vehicles stability

control system)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

443

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

To check the fluid level, simply look at

the see−through reservoir. The level

should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear or

when the fluid level in the accumulator is

high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it

may indicate a serious mechanical prob-

lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the

brake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20

times (until the brake pedal resistance

decreases and pedal travel increases).

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.

Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above,

the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once

opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air, and excess moisture can cause a

dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir

because brake fluid can harm your

hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your

hands or in your eyes, flush the af-

fected area with clean water immedi-

ately. If you still feel uncomfortable

with your hands or eyes, go to the

doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash

it off with water to prevent it from

damaging the parts or paint.

Checking brake fluid

(with vehicle stability control

system)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

444

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If hot O.K.

Close Open

If cold O.K.

If hot add If cold add

Check the fluid level through the reser-

voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-

mission fluid DEXRONrII or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80

km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little

more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is

hot (60_C—80_C or 140_F—175_F). You

may also check the level when the fluid

is cold (about room temperature,

10_C—30_C or 50_F—85_F) if the engine

has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-

ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. If

the fluid is cold, the level should be in the

“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the

fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.

If the level is at the low side of either

range, add automatic transmission fluid

DEXRONrII or III to bring the level within

the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-

terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,

turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-

voir cap, visually check the steering box

case, vane pump and hose connections

for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be

careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-

ing could be damaged.

Standard and double cab models

Checking power steering fluid

Checking tire inflation

pressure

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

445

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Access cab models

Keep your tire inflation pressures

at the proper level.

The recommended cold tire inflation

pressures, tire sizes and the com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

(payload) are described in Section 8.

The recommended tire inflation pres-

sures and tire sizes are also on the

tire and loading information label.

You should check the tire inflation

pressure every two weeks, or at least

once a month. And do not forget the

spare!

The following instructions for

checking tire inflation pressure

should be observed:

DThe pressure should be

checked only when the tires are

cold. If your vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours and has

not been driven for more than 1.5

km or 1 mile since, you will get

an accurate cold tire inflation pres-

sure reading.

DIf you cannot adjust the tire

pressure when the tires are

cold, add 20 to 30 kPa more to

the front tires and rear tires than

the cold tire pressure, but never

exceed the maximum cold tire

pressure molded on the tire side-

wall.

DAlways use a tire pressure

gauge. The appearance of a tire

can be misleading. Besides, tire

inflation pressures that are even

just a few pounds off can degrade

ride and handling.

DDo not bleed or reduce tire

inflation pressure after driving.

It is normal for the tire inflation

pressure to be higher after driving.

DNever exceed the vehicle capac-

ity weight. Passenger and lug-

gage weight should be located so

that the vehicle is balanced.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

446

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

PROCEDURE

1. Remove the tire valve cap.

2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.

3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.

4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,

insert the compressed air from the

valve. In case of applying too

much air, press the center of the

valve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation

pressure measurement and ad-

justment, apply soapy water to the

valve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.

If a gauge and air pump are not avail-

able, have your vehicle checked by

your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve

caps. Without the valve caps, dirt

or moisture could get into the

valve core and cause air leakage.

If the caps have been lost, have

new ones put on as soon as pos-

sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure may

waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-

ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-

hicle less safe to drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by your Toyota deal-

er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following condi-

tions may occur and cause an ac-

cident resulting in death or seri-

ous injuries.

Low tire pressure (underinfla-

tion)—

DExcessive wear

DUneven wear

DPoor handling

DPossibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire

DPoor sealing of the tire bead

DWheel deformation and/or tire

separation

DA greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

447

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

High tire pressure (overinfla-

tion)—

DPoor handling

DExcessive wear

DUneven wear

DA greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire’s tread for tread

wear indicators. If the indicators

show, replace the tires. The loca-

tion of tread wear indicators is

shown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,

etc., molded on the sidewall of

each tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−in

tread wear indicators to help you

know when the tires need replace-

ment. When the tread depth wears to

1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-

tors will appear. If you can see the

indicators in two or more adjacent

grooves, the tire should be replaced.

The lower the tread, the higher the

risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is

lost if the tread wears down below

4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as

cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, or bulges indi-

cating internal damage, the tire

should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be

properly repaired due to the size or

location of a cut or other damage, it

should be replaced. If you are not

sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

Checking and replacing tires

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

448

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If air loss occurs while driving, do not

continue driving. Driving even a short

distance can damage a tire beyond

repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years

old must be checked by a qualified

technician even if damage is not

obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they

have never or seldom been used.

This applies also to the spare tire and

tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of

the same size and construction,

and the same or greater maximum

load as the originally installed

tires. Also, on four−wheel drive

models, all the tires must be the

same brand and have the same

tread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire

may seriously affect handling, ride,

speedometer/odometer calibration,

ground clearance, and clearance be-

tween the body and tires or snow

chains.

Check that the maximum load of the

replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)

of either the front axle or the rear

axle, whichever is greater. As for the

maximum load of the tire, see the load

limit at maximum cold tire inflation

pressure mentioned on the sidewall

of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle

Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-

tification Label.

For details about the side wall of the

tire and the Certification Label.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-

tions. Otherwise, an accident

may occur resulting in death or

serious injuries.

DDo not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-

hicle, as this may cause dan-

gerous handling characteris-

tics resulting in loss of control.

DDo not use tires other than the

manufacturer’s recommended

size, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics

resulting in loss of control.

DFour−wheel drive models:

Do not use tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or

tread patterns, as this may

cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

449

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

For vehicles with vehicle stability

control system—

DDo not use tires of different

brands, sizes and construc-

tions. This may damage the

drive system and prevent the

vehicle stability control system

from functioning correctly.

Toyota recommends all four tires,

or at least both of the front or rear

tires be replaced at a time as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” in Section

4 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel

should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-

hicle handling and tire life. Wheels

can get out of balance with regular

use and should therefore be balanced

occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the

air valve should also be replaced

with a new one.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-

sure warning system is necessary

after you have rotated your tires.

See “Tire pressure warning sys-

tem” in Section 1−7.

With a spare tire of the same

wheel type as the installed tires

Rotating tires

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

450

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

With a spare tire of different

wheel type from the installed

tires

To equalize the wear and help ex-

tend tire life, Toyota recommends

that you rotate your tires accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule.

(For scheduled maintenance infor-

mation, please refer to the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-

er’s Manual Supplement”.)

However, the most appropriate tim-

ing for tire rotation may vary ac-

cording to your driving habits and

road surface conditions.

See “If you have a flat tire” in Section

4 for tire change procedure.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out−

of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-

sure warning system is necessary

after you have rotated your tires.

See “Tire pressure warning sys-

tem” in Section 1−7.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR

CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended

when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires

provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of

the same size, construction and load

capacity as the originally installed tires.

Also, on four−wheel drive models, all

the tires must be the same brand and

have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-

tioned above. Do not install studded tires

without first checking local regulations for

possible restrictions.

Installing snow tires and

chains

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

451

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

DDo not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended si-

ze, as this may cause dangerous

handling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

DFour−wheel drive models:

Do not use snow tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or tread

patterns, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics result-

ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all

wheels.

Installing snow tires on the rear wheels

only can lead to an excessive difference

in road grip capability between the front

and rear tires which could cause loss of

vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should

store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure

to install them in the same direction when

replacing.

CAUTION

DDo not drive with the snow tires

incorrectly inflated.

DNever drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

with any type of snow tires.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary according to location or

type of road, so always check local reg-

ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires as

tightly as possible. Do not use tire

chains on the front tires. Retighten

chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km

(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-

fully follow the instructions of the chain

manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be

scratched by the chain band, so remove

the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

DDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recom-

mended speed limit, whichever is

lower.

DDrive carefully avoiding bumps,

holes, and sharp turns, which may

cause the vehicle to bounce.

DAvoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may ad-

versely affect vehicle handling.

DWhen driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow

down before entering curves to

avoid losing control of the vehicle.

Otherwise an accident may occur.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

452

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as

bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the

wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,

the tire may slip off the wheel or cause

loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be

taken to ensure that the wheels are re-

placed by ones with the same load ca-

pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available

at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may

adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-

ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-

eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight

aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-

ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to

the body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-

ommended as they may have been sub-

jected to rough treatment or high mileage

and could fail without warning. Also, bent

wheels which have been straightened may

have structural damage and therefore

should not be used. Never use an inner

tube in a leaking wheel which is designed

for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

DDo not use wheels other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size,

as this may cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

DFour−wheel drive models:

Do not use wheels of different

brands, sizes and types, as this

may cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in loss of

control.

DWhen installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight

after driving your vehicle the first 1600

km (1000 miles).

DIf you have rotated, repaired, or

changed your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving

1600 km (1000 miles).

DWhen using tire chains, be careful not

to damage the aluminum wheels.

DUse only Toyota wheel nuts and

wrench designed for your aluminum

wheels.

DWhen balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent

and a plastic or rubber hammer.

DAs with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If

damaged, replace immediately.

Replacing wheels Aluminum wheel precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

453

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Electrical components

Checking battery condition 454. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery recharging precautions 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing fuses 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding washer fluid 457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing light bulbs 458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

454

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and

explosive hydrogen gas.

DDo not cause a spark from the bat-

tery with tools.

DDo not smoke or light a match near

the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

DAvoid contact with eyes, skin or

clothes.

DNever ingest electrolyte.

DWear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.

DKeep children away from the bat-

tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

DIf electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water

immediately and get immediate

medical attention. If possible, con-

tinue to apply water with a sponge

or cloth while en route to the medi-

cal office.

DIf electrolyte gets on your skin,

thoroughly wash the contact area. If

you feel pain or burning, get medi-

cal attention immediately.

DIf electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking

through to your skin, so immediate-

ly take off the exposed clothing and

follow the procedure above, if nec-

essary.

DIf you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water

or milk. Follow with milk of magne-

sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable

oil. Then go immediately for emer-

gency help.

Terminals

Ground cable

Hold−down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or loose

terminal connections, cracks, or loose

hold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off

with a solution of warm water and bak-

ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-

nals with grease to prevent further cor-

rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,

tighten their clamp nuts—but do not

overtighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only

enough to keep the battery firmly in

place. Overtightening may damage the

battery case.

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

455

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

NOTICE

zBe sure the engine and all accesso-

ries are off before performing main-

tenance.

zWhen checking the battery, remove

the ground cable from the negative

terminal (“−” mark) first and rein-

stall it last.

zBe careful not to cause a short cir-

cuit with tools.

zTake care no solution gets into the

battery when washing it.

Type A

Green Dark

Clear or

light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-

cator color.

Indicator color Condition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.

Have battery checked

by your Toyota deal-

er.

Clear or

Light

Yel low

Red

Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-

ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed

on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-

charger is off when connecting the

charger cables to the battery and when

disconnecting them.

CAUTION

DAlways charge the battery in an un-

confined area. Do not charge the

battery in a garage or closed room

where there is not sufficient ventila-

tion.

DOnly do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is

dangerous. The battery may ex-

plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the

engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

456

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type C

Good Blown

Type D

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

Checking and replacing fuses

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

457

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work, check the

fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,

they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” in Section 7−1 for

locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative

component off. Pull the suspected fuse

straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the

problem. The lid of the fuse box shows

the name of the circuit for each fuse. See

Section 8 for the functions controlled by

each circuit.

Type D—When any of the fuses are

blown, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the

pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out

tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has

blown, try replacing the suspected fuse

with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse

into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-

ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an

emergency you can pull out the “DOME”

or “A/C” fuse, which may be dispensable

for normal driving, and use it if its amper-

age rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-

age, use one that is lower, but as close

to the rating as possible. If the amperage

is lower than that specified, the fuse

might blow out again but this does not

indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get

the correct fuse as soon as possible and

return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of

spare fuses and keep them in your ve-

hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,

there is a problem with the electrical sys-

tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-

perage rating, or any other object, in

place of a fuse. This may cause ex-

tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work or the low

windshield washer fluid level warning

light comes on, the washer tank may be

empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.

However, in cold areas where tempera-

tures range below the freezing point, use

washer fluid containing antifreeze. This

product is available at your Toyota dealer

and most auto parts stores. Follow the

manufacturer’s directions for how much to

mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

458

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

The following illustrations show how to

gain access to the bulbs. When replacing

a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and

light switch are off. Use bulbs with the

wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

DTo prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they

are hot.

DHalogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.

They can burst or shatter if

scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb

only by its plastic or metal case.

Do not touch the glass part of a

bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights

such as headlights may temporarily fog up

when the lens becomes wet in the rain or

in a car wash. This is not a problem

because the fogging is caused by the

temperature difference between the outside

and inside of the lens, just like the

windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if

there is a large drop of water on the

inside of the lens, or if there is water

pooled inside the light, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Light bulbs Bulb

No. WType

Headlights —60/55 A

Front fog lights 9006 51 B

Parking lights 168 5 D

Front turn

signal/front side

marker lights

3157A 27/8 C

Rear turn signal

lights —21 C

Stop/tail/rear

side marker

lights

—21/5 D

Back−up lights 921 18 D

License plate

lights 168 5 D

High mounted

stoplight and

cargo lamps

921 18 D

Interior light — 8 E

Front personal

lights

Type A and C

Type B

—

3.8

Center personal

lights —3.8 D

Replacing light bulbs—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

459

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Light bulbs Bulb

No. WType

Vanity light —1.5 E

Door courtesy

lights 194 3.4 D

Glove box light —1.2 D

Step light —1.4 D

A: HB2 halogen bulbs

B: HB4 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

E: Double end bulbs 1. Open the hood. Unplug the connec-

tor. Remove the rubber cover.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

2. Release the bulb retaining spring

and remove the bulb. Install a new

bulb and the bulb retaining spring.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of the

bulb with the cutouts of the mounting

hole.

—Headlights

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

460

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

3. Install the rubber cover as shown,

and fit it securely on the boss. Then

plug in the connector.

Make sure the rubber cover fits securely

on the bulb base and the mounting body.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-

essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

If either the left or right front fog lights

burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front fog

light bulbs by yourself. You may dam-

age the vehicle.

LEFT SIDE PARKING LIGHT—Loosen the

bolt and remove the engine coolant reser-

voir.

—Front fog lights —Parking lights

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

461

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver. Remove

and install the clip as shown in the fol-

lowing illustrations.

Removing clip

Installing clip

—Front turn signal/front side

marker lights (standard and

access cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

462

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver. Remove

and install the clip as shown in the fol-

lowing illustrations.

Removing clip

Installing clip

—Front side marker/front turn

signal lights

(double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

463

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Remove the bolts. a: Back−up light

b: Rear turn signal light

c: Stop/tail/rear side marker light

—Rear turn signal,

stop/tail/rear side marker and

back−up lights (type A)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

464

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Remove the bolts.

—Rear turn signal,

stop/tail/rear side marker and

back−up lights (type B)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

465

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

a: Rear turn signal light

b: Stop/tail/rear side marker light

c: Back−up light

Remove the bolts. a: Back−up light

b: Rear turn signal light

c: Stop/tail/rear side marker light

Remove the bulb of the back−up light at

first when removing that of the rear turn

signal light.

—Rear turn signal,

stop/tail/rear side marker and

back−up lights (type C)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

466

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver. Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

a: High mounted stoplight

b: Cargo lamps

—License plate lights

—High mounted stoplight and

cargo lamps

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

467

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications

Dimensions 468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Payload 470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing capacity 473. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service specifications 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires 478. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses 479. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

468

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Two−wheel drive models

mm (in.)

Standard cab models Access cab models Double cab models

Standard bed StepSide bed

Overall length 5525 (217.5)∗1

5545 (218.3)∗2

5525 (217.5)∗1

5545 (218.3)∗2

5525 (217.5)∗1

5545 (218.3)∗25845 (230.1)

Overall width 1910 (75.2)

1910 (75.2)

1945 (76.6)∗3

2015 (79.3)∗4

2015 (79.3) 2015 (79.3)∗3

2025 (79.7)∗4

Overall height∗51795 (70.7) 1790 (70.5)∗6

1800 (70.9)∗7or8 1790 (70.5)

1880 (74.0)∗6

1890 (74.4)∗7

1895 (74.6)∗8

Wheelbase 3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3570 (140.5)

Front tread 1680 (66.1) 1680 (66.1) 1680 (66.1) 1680 (66.1)

Rear tread 1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1710 (67.3)

∗1: With steel bumper

∗2: With plastic bumper

∗3: With wheel arch moulding

∗4: With over fender

∗5: Unladen vehicle

∗6: With P245/70R16 tires

∗7: With P265/70R16 tires

∗8: With P265/65R17 tires

Dimensions

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

469

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Four−wheel drive models

mm (in.)

Standard cab models Access cab models Double cab models

Standard bed StepSide bed

Overall length 5525 (217.5)∗1

5545 (218.3)∗2

5525 (217.5)∗1

5545 (218.3)∗2

5525 (217.5)∗1

5545 (218.3)∗25845 (230.1)

Overall width 1910 (75.2)

1945 (76.6)∗3

1910 (75.2)

1945 (76.6)∗3

2015 (79.3)∗4

2015 (79.3) 2015 (79.3)∗3

2025 (79.7)∗4

Overall height∗51805 (71.1)∗6

1815 (71.5)∗7or8

1810 (71.3)∗6

1820 (71.7)∗7or8 1810 (71.3)

1890 (74.4)∗6

1900 (74.8)∗7

1905 (75.0)∗8

Wheelbase 3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3570 (140.5)

Front tread 1675 (65.9) 1675 (65.9) 1675 (65.9) 1675 (65.9)

Rear tread 1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1710 (67.3)

∗1: With steel bumper

∗2: With plastic bumper

∗3: With wheel arch moulding

∗4: With over fender

∗5: Unladen vehicle

∗6: With P245/70R16 tires

∗7: With P265/70R16 tires

∗8: With P265/65R17 tires

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

470

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

kg (lb.)

Cab type Engine Driving system Transmission type Deck type Grade∗4Payload∗5, 6

Standard cab

models

1GR−FE Two−wheel drive Manual transmission Standard bed Standard 650 (1435)

Automatic transmission Standard bed Standard 637 (1405)

2UZ−FE

Two−wheel drive Automatic transmission Standard bed Standard

853 (1882)

832 (1836)∗1

900 (1985)∗3

Four−wheel drive Automatic transmission Standard bed Standard 728 (1607)

708 (1561)∗1

Access cab

models

1GR−FE Two−wheel drive Manual transmission Standard bed SR5 630 (1391)

Automatic transmission Standard bed SR5 608 (1342)

2UZ−FE Two−wheel drive Automatic transmission

Standard bed

SR5 734 (1620)

713 (1574)∗1

Limited 781 (1722)

760 (1676)∗1

StepSide bed

SR5 597 (1318)

576 (1272)∗1

Limited 645 (1422)

624 (1376)∗1

Payload

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

471

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

kg (lb.)

Cab type Engine Driving system Transmission type Deck type Grade∗4 Payload∗5, 6

Access cab

models 2UZ−FE Four−wheel

drive

Automatic transmission Standard bed

SR5 614 (1355)

593 (1309)∗1

Limited 669 (1477)

649 (1431)∗1

Automatic transmission StepSide bed

SR5 486 (1073)

465 (1027)∗1

Limited 533 (1177)

513 (1131)∗1

Double cab

models 2UZ−FE

Two−wheel drive

Automatic transmission Standard bed SR5

772 (1702)

753 (1661)∗1or2

734 (1620)∗1, 2

Automatic transmission Standard bed Limited

761 (1678)

742 (1637)∗1or2

723 (1596)∗1, 2

Four−wheel

drive

Automatic transmission Standard bed SR5

663 (1462)

644 (1421)∗1or2

625 (1380)∗1, 2

Automatic transmission Standard bed Limited

652 (1438)

633 (1397)∗1or2

615 (1356)∗1, 2

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

472

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

∗1: With towing package

∗2: With electric moon roof

∗3: Without optional equipment

∗4: See “Model code” on page xi in the beginning of this manual if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is.

∗5:

Maximum payload including weight of driver, passengers, optional equipment and cargo

∗6: Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory increases the weight of the vehicle, thereby reducing

payload. Contact your Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

473

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

kg (lb.)

Standard cab

models

1GR−FE engine Two−wheel drive models Without towing package 2358 (5200)

2UZ−FE engine

Two−wheel drive models Without towing package 2494 (5500)

With towing package 3311 (7300)

Four−wheel drive models Without towing package 2494 (5500)

With towing package 3311 (7300)

Access cab models

1GR−FE engine Two−wheel drive models Without towing package 2268 (5000)

2UZ−FE engine

Two−wheel drive models Without towing package 2494 (5500)

With towing package 3311 (7300)

Four−wheel drive models Without towing package 2358 (5200)

With towing package 3175 (7000)

Double cab models 2UZ−FE engine

Two−wheel drive models Without towing package 2358 (5200)

With towing package 3175 (7000)

Four−wheel drive models Without towing package 2222 (4900)

With towing package 3039 (6700)

∗: Trailer weight + cargo weight

Towing capacity∗

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

474

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Model:

1GR−FE and 2UZ−FE

Type:

1GR−FE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

2UZ−FE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

1GR−FE engine

94.0 95.0 (3.70 3.74)

2UZ−FE engine

94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):

1GR−FE engine 3956 (241.4)

2UZ−FE engine 4664 (284.6)

Fuel type:

1GR−FE engine

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or

higher. For improved vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of premium unleaded

gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91

(Research Octane Number 96) or

higher is recommended.

2UZ−FE engine

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or

higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):

100 (26.4, 22.0)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

1GR−FE engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)

2UZ−FE engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:

1GR−FE engine

DENSO K20HR−U11

NGK LFR6C11

2UZ−FE engine

DENSO KS20R11

NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

1.1 (0.043)

Engine Fuel Service specifications

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

475

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.

qt.):

1GR−FE engine

With filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)

Without filter 4.2 (4.4, 3.7)

2UZ−FE engine

With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)

Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

With manual transmission

10.4 (11.0, 9.2)

With automatic transmission

1GR−FE engine 10.3 (10.9, 9.1)

2UZ−FE engine

Standard and access cab models

12.6 (13.0, 11.1)

Double cab models

12.8 (13.5, 11.3)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is

used in your Toyota vehicle at factory

fill. In order to avoid technical problems,

only use “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,

non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with

long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic

acid technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20_C (68_F):

12.6—12.8 V Fully charged

12.2—12.4 V Half charged

11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-

ter the key is removed with all the

lights turned off

Charging rates:

5 A max.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

476

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

CLUTCH

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

5—15 (0.2—0.6)

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1.8 (1.9, 1.6)

Oil type:

Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W−90

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),

L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type:

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid only

as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change

automatic transmission fluid only if your

vehicle is driven under one of the Special

Operating Conditions listed in your

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When

changing the automatic transmission fluid,

use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF

JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring

optimum transmission performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission

fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF

WS” may cause deterioration in shift

quality, locking up of your transmission

accompanied by vibration, and ultimate-

ly damage the automatic transmission

of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1.0 (1.1, 0.9)

Oil type:

Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W−90

DIFFERENTIAL

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Front

1.15 (1.2, 1.0)

Rear

Standard and access cab models

Two−wheel drive models

Standard differential

3.80 (4.0, 3.3)

Limited−slip differential

3.15 (3.3, 2.8)

Four−wheel drive models

Standard differential

3.50 (3.7, 3.1)

Limited−slip differential

2.85 (3.0, 2.5)

Double cab models

Standard differential

4.00 (4.2, 3.5)

Limited−slip differential

3.35 (3.5, 2.9)

Oil type:

Standard differential

Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Limited−slip differential

Hypoid gear oil for limited−slip differ-

ential API GL−5

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

477

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Recommended oil viscosity:

Front

SAE 75W−90

Rear

Standard differential

Synthetic oil SAE 75W−140

Limited−slip differential

Above −18_C (0_F)

SAE 90

Below −18_C (0_F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

(Four−wheel drive models)

Propeller shafts:

Spiders

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI

No.2

Double cardan joint

Molybdenum−disulfide lithium base

chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Slide yokes

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI

No.2 or Molybdenum−disulfide lithium

base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed

with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)

with the engine running, mm (in.):

Without vehicle stability control system

95 (3.7)

With vehicle stability control system

80 (3.1)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment:

Pedal type—when depressed with the

force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.1 lbf)

8—10 clicks

Lever type—when pulled with the force

of 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45 lbf)

8—12 clicks

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII

or III

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

478

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Standard and access cab models

Tire size Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

Front Rear Spare tire

P245/70R16 106S 200 (2.0, 29) 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 7J or 7JJ 16

P265/70R16 111S 180 (1.8, 26)∗1

200 (2.0, 29)∗2

200 (2.0, 29)∗1

210 (2.1, 30)∗2

200 (2.0, 29)∗1

210 (2.1, 30)∗27J or 7JJ 16

P265/65R17 110S 200 (2.0, 29) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 71/2JJ 17

∗1: Vehicles without off−road package

∗2: Vehicles with off−road package

Double cab models

Tire size Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

Front Rear Spare tire

P245/70R16 106S 220 (2.2, 32) 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 7J or 7JJ 16

P265/70R16 111S 200 (2.0, 29)∗1

220 (2.2, 32)∗2

220 (2.2, 32)∗1

230 (2.3, 33)∗2

220 (2.2, 32)∗1

230 (2.3, 33)∗27J or 7JJ 16

P265/65R17 110S 200 (2.0, 29) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 71/2JJ 17

∗1: Vehicles without off−road package

∗2: Vehicles with off−road package

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-

sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions” in Section 7−2.

Wheel nut torque, N⋅m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

110 (11.5, 83)

Tires

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

479

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Engine compartment

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)

1. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mir-

ror heaters

2. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

3. TOW BRK 30 A (with towing pack-

age): Trailer brake controller

4. SUB BATT 30 A (with towing pack-

age): Trailer sub battery

5. TOW TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail

lights)

6. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse

7. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

8. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse

9. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

10. PWR OUTLET 1 15 A: Power outlets

11. ECU−B 5 A: Vehicle stability control

system, front passenger occupant clas-

sification system

12. H−LP RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight

(high beam)

13. PWR OUTLET 2 15 A: Power outlet

14. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal

lights, vanity light, ignition switch light,

step light, door courtesy lights, open

door warning light

15. H−LP LH 10 A : Left−hand headlight

(high beam)

16. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, leak detection pump, emis-

sion control system

17. RADIO 25 A: Audio system

18. HEAD RL 10 A (with daytime running

light system): Right−hand headlight

(low beam)

19. A/C 10 A: Air conditioning system

20. A/F 20 A: A/F sensor

21. HEAD LL 10 A (with daytime running

light system): Left−hand headlight (low

beam)

Fuses (standard and access

cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

480

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

22. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

23. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, electronic throttle control

system

24. HAZ 15 A: Emergency flashers, turn

signal lights, towing converter

25. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, fuel pump, “EFI NO.2”

fuse

26. AM2 30 A: Ignition system, starting

system, “IGN” and “STA” fuses

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

28. WIP 20 A: Windshield wipers and

washer

29. TURN 5 A: Turn signal lights

30. ECU IG 5 A: Anti−lock brake system,

vehicle stability control system, multi-

plex communication system, tire pres-

sure warning system

31. 4WD 20 A: Four−wheel drive control

system, A.D.D. control system

32. ACC 15 A: Cigarette lighter, audio sys-

tem, power rear view mirrors, “PWR

OUTLET 1” and “PWR OUTLET 2”

fuses

33. GAUGE 10 A: Gauges and meters,

back−up lights, starting system, air

conditioning system, auto anti−glare in-

side rear view mirror, outside rear view

mirror heaters

34. IGN 5 A: SRS airbag system, multiport

fuel injection system/sequential multi-

port fuel injection system, discharge

warning light, ignition system, vehicle

stability control system, front passenger

occupant classification system

35. CARGO LP 5 A: Cargo lamp

36. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, turn signal

lights, license plate lights, instrument

panel lights, parking lights, glove box

light

37. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-

tem

38. HORN 10 A: Horns

39. STA 5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system, gauges and meters

40. STOP 15 A: Stoplights, high mounted

stoplight, anti−lock brake system, ve-

hicle stability control system, towing

converter

Fuses (type B)

41. AM1 40 A: Starting system, “ACC”,

“WIP”, “4WD”, “ECU−IG”, “GAUGE” and

“TURN” fuses

42. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system,

“A/C” fuse

43. J/B 50 A: “POWER”, “CARGO LP”,

“TAIL”, “OBD”, “HORN” and “STOP”

fuses

44. ABS 2 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,

vehicle stability control system

45. ABS 3 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,

vehicle stability control system

46. ST3 30 A: Starting system, “STA” fuse

47. POWER 30 A: Power door lock sys-

tem, power windows, power back win-

dow, power seat

Fuse (type C)

48. FL ALT 100 A (without towing pack-

age) or 140 A (with towing package):

“AM1”, “HTR”, “J/B”, “MIR HTR”,

“FOG”, “TOW BRK”, “SUB BATT”,

“TOW TAIL”, “PWR OUTLET 1” and

“PWR OUTLET 2” fuses

49. A/PUMP 60 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

481

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat audio system,

rear seat entertainment system

2. A/F 20 A: A/F sensor

3. DEF/I UP 7.5 A: Outside rear view

mirror heaters, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

4. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system

5. H−LP LL 10 A (with daytime running

light system): Left−hand headlight (low

beam)

Engine compartment

6. H−LP RL 10 A (with daytime running

light system): Right−hand headlight

(low beam)

7. STA 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system

8. H−LP LH 10 A (with daytime running

light system): Left−hand headlight

(high beam)

9. H−LP RH 10 A (with daytime running

light system): Right−hand headlight

(high beam)

10. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail

lights)

Engine compartment

11. BATT CHARGE 30 A: Trailer sub bat-

tery

12. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con-

troller

13. CARGO LP 7.5 A: Cargo lamp

14. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

15. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse

16. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse

17. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, electronic throttle control

system

Fuses (double cab models)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

482

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Instrument panel

18. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

19. H−LP RH 15 A (without daytime run-

ning light system): Right−hand head-

light

20. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

21. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

22. DRL 15 A (with daytime running light

system): Daytime running light system

H−LP LH 15 A (without daytime run-

ning light system): Left−hand head-

light

23. AM2 25 A: Starting system

24. TURN−HAZ 20 A: Turn signal lights,

emergency flashers, towing converter

25. RAD NO.3 30 A: Audio system/video

system

26. ST 30 A: Starting system, “STA” fuse

27. HORN 10 A: Horns

28. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, leak detection pump

29. DOME 10 A: Center interior and per-

sonal lights, personal lights, gauges

and meters, clock, ignition switch light,

door courtesy lights, step light, vanity

lights

30. ECU−B 7.5 A: Multiplex communication

system, front passenger occupant clas-

sification system, driver and front pas-

senger door lock system, gauges and

meters, wireless door lock system

31. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mir-

ror heaters

32. RAD NO.1 20 A: Audio system, rear

seat entertainment system

33. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, trailer lights (tail

lights), parking lights, multiport fuel in-

jection system/sequential multiport fuel

injection system, license plate lights

34. ECU−IG 10 A: Charging system, stop

lights, anti−lock brake system, vehicle

stability control system, traction control

system, electric moon roof, driver and

front passenger door lock system,

gauges and meters, multi−information

display, power outlets, multiplex com-

munication system, tire pressure warn-

ing system, auto anti−glare inside rear

view mirror

35. WSH 25 A: Wipers and washer

36. AC INV 15 A: Power outlets

37. IGN 2 20 A: Starting system, multiport

fuel injection system/sequential multi-

port fuel injection system

38. PWR NO.3 20 A: Rear passenger’s

power window (right side)

39. PWR NO.4 20 A: Rear passenger’s

power window (left side)

40. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

41. RAD NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system/video

system, rear seat audio system, rear

seat entertainment system, multiplex

communication system, clock, shift

position indicator lights

42. 4WD 20 A: A.D.D. control system,

four−wheel drive system

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

483

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

43. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high−mounted

stop lights, multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system, anti−lock brake system, vehicle

stability control system, traction control

system, trailer light (stop lights), trailer

brake controller, towing converter, mul-

tiplex communication system

44. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-

tem

45. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights,

glove box light, lights of seat heaters,

cigarette lighter, ashtrays, multi−infor-

mation display, audio system/video sys-

tem, gauges and meters, air condition-

ing systems, power outlets

46. PWR NO.1 25 A: Driver’s door lock

system, driver’s power window

47. WIP 25 A: Wiper and washers

48. IGN 1 10 A: Charging system, SRS

airbag system, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, vehicle stability control

system, gauges and meters, air condi-

tioning system, front passenger occu-

pant classification system

49. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof

50. PWR NO.2 25 A: Front passengers’

door lock system, front passenger’s

power window

51. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning systems,

electric cooling fan, back window de-

fogger, seat heaters

52. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

53. GAUGE 15 A: Back−up lights, gauge

and meters, emergency flashers, slip

indicator light, vehicle stability control

system, four−wheel drive system, trailer

lights (back−up lights), multiport fuel

injection system/sequential multiport

fuel injection system, shift position indi-

cator lights

54. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

55. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

Fuses (type B)

56. MAIN 40 A: “H−LP RH”, “H−LP LH”

“H−LP LL” and “H−LP RL” fuses

57. DOOR NO.2 30 A: Multiplex commu-

nication system (power door lock sys-

tem, security system)

58. PWR SEAT 30 A: Power front seats

59. AM1 40 A: “HTR”, “CIG”, “GAUGE”,

“RAD NO.2”, “ECU−IG”, “WIP”, “WSH”,

“IGN 1”, “IGN 2” and “4WD” fuses

60. PWR NO.5 30 A: Power back window

Fuses (type D)

61. ABS NO.2 30 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem, vehicle stability control system

62. DEFOG 40 A: Back window defogger

63. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system

64. TOWING R/B 60 A: “TOWING TAIL”,

“BATT CHARGE” and “TOWING BRK”

fuses

65. ALT 140 A: “DEFOG”, “ABS NO.2”,

“CARGO LP”, “HEATER”, “AM1”, “PWR

SEAT”, “TAIL”, “STOP”, “SUN ROOF”,

“PANEL”, “OBD”, “FOG”, “PWR NO.1”,

“PWR NO.2”, “PWR NO.5”, “AC INV”,

“PWR NO.3”, “PWR NO.4”, “PWR

OUTLET” and “SEAT HTR” fuses

66. ABS NO.1 40 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem, vehicle stability control system

67. A/PUMP 50 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

68. R/B 30 A: “A/F” fuse

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

484

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

485

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.

OWNERS AND CAMPER INFORMATION

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and camper

information

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Camper information 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

486

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

If you believe that your vehicle

has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free:

1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of ve-

hicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-

ther call the Auto Safety Hotline

toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or

366−0123 in Washington, D.C.

area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.

Department of Transportation,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from the Hot-

line.

This information has been prepared in ac-

cordance with regulation issued by the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Administra-

tion of the U.S. Department of

Transportation. It provides the purchasers

and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota

vehicles with information on truck−camper

loading. Your Toyota dealer will help an-

swer any questions you may have as you

read this information.

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners Camper information—

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

487

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Rear end of truck bed

Recommended location

for cargo center of

gravity for cargo weight

rating

Standard cab models

Rear end of truck bed

Recommended location

for cargo center of

gravity for cargo weight

rating

Access cab models (standard bed)

Rear end of truck bed

Recommended location

for cargo center of

gravity for cargo weight

rating

Access cab models (StepSide bed)

Recommended location for

cargo center of gravity for

cargo weight rating

Rear end of

truck bed

Double cab models

The figures given in the illustration indi-

cate the recommended center of gravity

zone.

Standard cab models

A: 1186 mm (46.7 in.)

B: 1058 mm (41.7 in.)

Access cab models

Standard bed

A: 1186 mm (46.7 in.)

B: 1058 mm (41.7 in.)

StepSide bed

A: 1158 mm (45.6 in.)

B: 1030 mm (40.6 in.)

Double cab models

A: 1189 mm (46.8 in.)

B: 1062 mm (41.8 in.)

CAUTION

If a load is too far back, it can cause

dangerous handling. If it is too far

forward, the front axle may be over-

loaded.

—Center of gravity location

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

488

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Camper center of gravity

Recommended center of

gravity location zone

CARGO WEIGHT RATING

Standard cab models

3 people, V6,

453 kg (1000 lb.)

3 people, V8,

476 kg (1050 lb.)

Access cab models

5 people, V6,

295 kg (650 lb.)

6 people, V6,

204 kg (450 lb.)

6 people, V8, 2WD, Standard bed

295 kg (650 lb.)

6 people, V8, 2WD, StepSide bed

204 kg (450 lb.)

6 people, V8, 4WD, Standard bed

159 kg (350 lb.)

6 people, V8, 4WD, StepSide bed

91 kg (200 lb.)

Double cab models

6 people, V8, 2WD,

295 kg (650 lb.)

6 people, V8, 4WD,

181 kg (400 lb.)

When the truck is used to carry a slide−in

camper, the total cargo load of the truck

consists of the manufacturer’s camper

weight figure, the weight of installed addi-

tional camper equipment not included in

the manufacturer’s camper weight figure,

the weight of camper cargo, and the

weight of passengers in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed

the truck’s cargo weight rating and the

camper’s center of gravity should fall with-

in the truck’s recommended center of

gravity zone when installed.

CAUTION

Be careful—overloading can cause

dangerous braking and handling prob-

lems, and can damage your vehicle

and its tires.

—Cargo weight rating and

proper matching

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

489

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

Gross axle weight rating

Front GAWR Rear GAWR

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded,

drive to a scale and weigh on the front

and on the rear wheels separately to de-

termine axle loads. Individual axle loads

should not exceed either of the Gross

Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of

the axle loads should not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

These ratings are given on the vehicle

Certification Label which is located on the

door latch post on the left side of the

vehicle. See “Your Toyota’s identification”

in Section 2 for the Certification Label

location. If weight ratings are exceeded,

move or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Not exceed GVWR

GAWR

Front 1588 kg (3500 lb.)

Rear

Standard and access cab models

V6 1615 kg (3560 lb.)

Standard bed

1656 kg (3650 lb.)

StepSide bed

1615 kg (3560 lb.)

Double cab models

1706 kg (3760 lb.)

GVWR

Two−wheel drive models

Standard cab models

V6 2494 kg (5500 lb.)

V8 2858 kg (6300 lb.)

Access cab models

V6 2585 kg (5700 lb.)

Standard bed

2858 kg (6300 lb.)

StepSide bed

2726 kg (6010 lb.)

Double cab models

2993 kg (6600 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models

Standard cab models

2858 kg (6300 lb.)

Access cab models

Standard bed

2858 kg (6300 lb.)

StepSide bed

2726 kg (6010 lb.)

Double cab models

2993 kg (6600 lb.)

If weight ratings are exceeded, move or

remove items to bring all weights below

the ratings.

—Gross axle and vehicle

weight ratings

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

490

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

Publication No. OM34440U

Part No. 01999-34440

Printed in Japan 01-0504-00

( U)

Quick index

DIf a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 170. . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle will not start 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your engine stalls while driving 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle overheats 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf you have a flat tire 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle needs to be towed 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTips for driving during break−in period 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DHow to start the engine 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DGeneral maintenance 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DComplete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

1GR−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane

Number 91) or higher

For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline

with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is

recommended.

2UZ−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane

Number 91) or higher

See page 341 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity:

100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 lmp. gal.)

Engine oil:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is

recommended.

See page 439 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 444 through 452.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 478.

TU−4

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top

running order is to maintain it properly from

the moment you drive it off the showroom

floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is

packed with literally everything you need to

know to perform your own maintenance in

virtually every area of your new vehicle.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for TOYOTA TUNDRA may

be purchased from any Toyota dealer or the

Material Distribution Center. To purchase the

repair manual, please contact your Toyota deal-

er or call the Material Distribution Center toll−

free at 1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-

vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-

er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-

tenance is required and clearly explains how to do the

work yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-

placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil

and filter replacement.

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU  PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

DComfortable

DEasy to use

DConvenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

Toyota 2005 Tundra Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation